,.;■»• ■ ■' ',:, V -i~-, '',;.''■ 
 
 ■f^:- 
 
 ' 
 
 'f 
 
 '^ ■ 
 
■ \ 
 
 THE 
 
 TEACHER'S HANDBOOK 
 
 OF THE 
 
 TONIC SOL-FA SYSTEM. 
 
 A GUIDE TO THE TEACHING OF SINGING IN SCHOOLS 
 BY THE TONIC SOL-FA SYSTEM. 
 
 BY 
 
 ALEXANDER T. CRINGAN, 
 
 Graduate and Licentiate of the Tonic SoLFa College, London, England. 
 Superintendent of Music in Toronto Public Schools, 
 
 TORONTO : 
 
 CANADA PUBLISHING COMPANY, 
 
 (limited). 
 

 • 
 
 V V"' •-■■ ^ '■' ■ 
 
 '■ A < .. 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Parliament, in the Office of the Minister of Agricul- 
 ture, in the year 1889, by The Canada Publishing Company (Limited). 
 
 ■■■. ,'V'.f 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE importance of the study ct Music is n(>w 
 freely recognized, and in numerous Towns a yd 
 Cities it is placed, as a regular subject, upon the 
 curriculum. Progressive teachers throughout the 
 Dominion are now fully alive to the beneficial effects 
 of the study of Music as a refining, moral influence 
 in the schoolroom and the home. Many teachers, 
 are earnestly investigating the various " systems '* ot 
 teaching music, and the majority of those have 
 decided in favor of the Tonic Sol-fa System as being 
 based on true philosophical principles of teaching, 
 such as are now employed in teaching all other 
 subjects. This system is not, as many suppose, a 
 new system, having been before the public for 
 upwards of forty years. In England, it has had to 
 contend with most fierce and prejudiced opposition, 
 which it has gradually overcome by its intrinsic merit, 
 until now it is approved by the leading Musicians 
 and Educators, and is used in ninety per cent of the 
 schools which succeed in passing the Government 
 Examination in Music. In Canada, it has met with 
 the same opposition and suspicion, but as its merits 
 
4 
 
 as a system have become known, this has gradually 
 been disarmed, until now it has been adopted by 
 the Educational authorities of the leading Cities and 
 Towns of the Dominion. 
 
 Improved teaching can only be looked for through 
 an improved knowledge of the subject, and increased 
 skill in the methods of teaching by the regular 
 teachers. The object of this work is to aid the 
 teacher in presenting the subject in a manner which 
 will make the study a source of pleasure and profit 
 to teacher and pupil alike. The author offers his 
 experience in the hope that it may lighten the 
 labours of his co-workers in a great and good cause. 
 
 The plan of this work deals in detail with each 
 branch of the subject, and explains, by means of 
 Specimen Lessons and appropriate suggestions, tlie 
 simplest and most practical methods of application. 
 A number of exercises are given in each department, 
 which, although insufficient in themselves, will enable 
 the teacher to prepare others as may be deemed 
 necessary. 
 
 ALEX. T. CRINGAN. 
 
 ( 
 
INDEX. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Accents 17, 35 
 
 Act'on Songs Co 
 
 Beating time 40, 42 
 
 Breathing 20,133 
 
 Beginning to teach 10 
 
 Calisthenics 62 
 
 Chromatics 155 
 
 Chordal treatment 16, 178 
 
 Colors 34, 96, 98 
 
 Continuations 45 
 
 Division of Lesson 13 
 
 Ear Exercises, 52, loi, 119, 124, 130, 162 
 
 Expression 108 
 
 Expression Marks 186 
 
 Eye-Training 32 
 
 Finger Signs 7 
 
 Interesting Devices 103 
 
 Instrumental aid 56 
 
 Manual Signs 6, 15 
 
 Marks 65 
 
 Measure 17, 37 
 
 Metronome 40 
 
 Minor Mode 149 
 
 Modulator 67, 112, 139, 148 
 
 Modulator Drill, 25, 79, 90, 112, 121, 128 
 
 Morning and Evening 106 
 
 Patterning 13 
 
 Pitching Keys 138 
 
 Postition, Best for singing 11 
 
 Principles of the System 14 
 
 Pulses 17, 4O 
 
 PAOF. 
 
 Registers, The 23 
 
 Rests, silences 45, iiS 
 
 Rote Songs, 60 
 
 Running in grooves 27 
 
 School Songs 57, 106, 131 
 
 Singing softly 11 
 
 " with pupils 12 
 
 " at sight, ...31, 80, 97, 1X4, 123, 129 
 
 " from books 122 
 
 Specimen Lessons : — 
 
 On Doh, Me, Soh 68 
 
 " Time 74, 77, 85 
 
 " Octaves 87 
 
 • Te and Ray 88 
 
 " Ear Exercises 102 
 
 " Teaching Songs 107 
 
 " Transition 140 
 
 " StaflF Notation 167 
 
 Staff Notation, Explanation of. x66 
 
 Syllabus for Graded Schools ...63, 134 
 
 Syncopation 161 
 
 Time, Hints on, 31, 80, 97, 114, 123, 158 
 
 " Chart 8 
 
 Time-Names 46 
 
 " Signatures 172 
 
 Transition 137, 183 
 
 Unexpected in teaching 82 
 
 Vocalising 28 
 
 Voice, The 20 
 
 " Training 109, 125, 132 
 
 Writing on black-board 36 
 
 ' '^' ^; ■^.^ ' 
 
MANUAL SIGNS OF TONES IN KEY. 
 
 As seen from the left of the teacher^ rot as seen from the front. Teachprr 
 
 should particularly notice this. 
 
 SOH. 
 
 The Grand or bright tone. 
 
 TE. 
 
 The Piercing or sensitive tone* 
 
 FAH. . 
 
 The Desolate or awe-inspiring tone. 
 
 LAH. 
 
 TheSi»o T 
 ■weeping tonr 
 
 ME. 
 
 The Stbadv or calm tone. 
 
 DOH. 
 
 The Strong ox firm tone. 
 
 RAY. 
 
 The Rousing or hopeful tonek 
 
 Note.— "Th^ie proximate verbal ce^cripfions of mantal effect are only trw ^ 
 the tones , of the scale when sung slowly - wbeD the ear is filled with the key, ati* 
 when the e&'«t is hot modified by harmony.'" 
 
FINGER-SIGNS FOR TIME. 
 
 As seen from the Teacher' h point of view, the back of the 
 hand being shown to the pupils. 
 
 TAA- 
 
 TAATAI. 
 
 tafatefe. 
 
 TAAtefe. 
 
 TAA-efe. 
 
 tafaTAl. 
 
 8AA. 
 
 TAAS/iZ. 8 A ATM. 
 
 •AA. 
 
 -AATAI 
 
 Note. — "These Signs are generally given with the left hand to distinguish them from the 
 Hand-signs, whif h a^a gi\en with the right. The back of the hand is toward the pupils, 
 so that the thumb uiay not be seen, for we never divide the pulse into five equal parts. 
 Some Teachers find a difficult}^ in dividing and joining their finders quickly enough. 
 To them it will be of great assistance to use the fingers of the right hand inside the 
 bald-up left hand, for the purpose of placing and keeping the left-hand fingers as they 
 would wish. Teachers reserve their right-hand for beating time j sometimes tapping the 
 pulses on the top of the left-hand ^whicb is held still), and sometimes beating time in the 
 regular way close by. The wooa-cuts are from the Teacher's point of view, not from 
 the side seen by the pupils." 
 
8 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 TONIC SOLFA TIME CHAKT, 
 
 BY JOHN CURWEN. 
 
 
 WHOLES. HALVES. 
 
 
 QUARTERS. 
 
 
 THIRDS 
 
 :1 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 ,1 1 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 :1 .1 .1 
 
 TAA 
 
 
 
 
 tafatefe 
 
 
 
 taataitee. 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 .1 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 :1 - .) 
 
 •AA 
 
 
 
 
 TAAtefe 
 
 
 
 taa-aitee 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 :l .1 .- 
 
 8AA 
 
 
 
 
 TAA-fe 
 
 
 
 taatai-ee 
 
 :1 .1 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 A .1 
 
 
 
 : .1 .) 
 
 TAATAI 
 
 
 
 
 tafaTAI 
 
 
 
 saataitee 
 
 :- .1 
 
 
 
 
 ,1 .1 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 :1 .- . 
 
 -AATAI 
 
 
 
 
 safatefe 
 
 
 
 taa-alAef 
 
 : .1 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 ,1 .1 
 
 f 
 
 
 :l . . 
 
 SAATAl 
 
 
 
 
 tafatestf 
 
 
 
 tasLsai-ee 
 
 :l . 
 
 
 
 :1 
 
 • 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 :1 . .1 
 
 TAAS.4I 
 
 
 
 
 TAAsefe 
 
 
 
 taasaitee 
 
 EIGHTHS. 
 
 
 
 
 SIXT 
 
 HS (Threk Accents) 
 
 : L 1 ,1 1 
 
 .1 
 
 I 
 
 ,1 
 
 1 
 
 
 :1 
 
 1 
 
 .1 1 <1 1 
 
 tanafanatenefei 
 
 le 
 
 
 
 
 
 tafatefetifl 
 
 NINTHS. 
 
 ,i 1 1 J 1 1 J i 1 
 
 taralatereletirili 
 
 SIXTHS (Two AOOBNTS). 
 3 .S 
 
 :1 1 1 .1 1 1 
 
 taralaterele 
 
 [NoTK. — "Ai" is pronounced as in maid, fail, etc. "Aa" is 
 
 pronounced as in father, " a " as in mad, " e " as in led, and " i " 
 
 , as in ltd. These time-names are copied from M. Paris's " Langue 
 
 des durtes." The minute divisions are seldom used except in 
 
 Instrumental Music] . 
 
HOW TO TEACH 
 
 THE 
 
 TONIC SOL-FA SYSTEM OF MUSIC. 
 
 PART FI RST. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE STEPS OF THE SYSTEM. 
 
 Since the introduction of the Tontc Sol-fa system, 
 many teachers have adopted the notation^ but have 
 not taken sufficient pains to inform themselves of the 
 grading of the various steps, or the methods of pre- 
 sentation which are peculiar to the system. As a 
 natural consequence, their teaching has been of an 
 irregular and haphazard description, which has too 
 often, though unintentionally, been the means of 
 bringing discredit on the system. " The easy before 
 the difficult," " the simple before the compound." and 
 " one thing at a time," are maxims with which every 
 teacher is familiar, but their application to the teach- 
 ing of music is still far from having become general. 
 
 The Tonic Sol-fa system is based on the true prin- 
 ciples of teaching, and the methods by which they 
 are applied cannot fail to commend themselves to all 
 practical teachers. In order to secure the best possi- 
 ble results, a careful adherence to the steps of the 
 method is absolutely necessary. - * " 
 
lO THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 The system is divided into six steps. The two 
 principal subjects, Time and Tune, are taught sepa- 
 rately throughout. The arrangement of the primary 
 steps is as follows : — 
 
 FIRST STEP. 
 
 Tune. — The DOH chord (d n s) with all octaves. 
 Time. — Whole pulse tones, half pulse tones and prolonged 
 tones, in two, three or four-pulse measure. 
 
 SECOND STEP. 
 
 Tune. — The SOH chord (s t r') with all octaves. 
 Time — Quarter pulse tones, pulse-and-half tones and silent 
 pulses, 'in any measure. 
 
 THIRD STEP. 
 
 Tune.— The FAH chord (f 1 d') with all octaves. 
 Time. — Combinations of half and quarter pulse tones, and 
 silent half-pulses. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 OENEBAL HINTS. 
 
 BlEUINNINQ TO TEACH. 
 
 Many excellent teachers have been 
 deterred from attempting to teach 
 music by the erroneous impression that only those 
 who are naturally gifted with a good voice or a musi- 
 cal temperament arc qualified to teach music. Such, 
 however, is fortunately far from being the case. On 
 the contrary, teachers who are not so gifted, have a 
 much better appreciation of the difficulties to be over- 
 come by their pupils in learning to sing, and can 
 
GENERAL HINTS. II 
 
 more readily lend assistance when necessary, than 
 the more gifted teachers, who find no serious obstacles 
 in their personal studies of music. Let the teacher, 
 once master the first step and give the first lesson, 
 and difficulties which formerly seemed insurmountable 
 will gradually vanish, to be succeeded by wonder 
 that a subject so full of pleasure and interest to 
 teacher and pupils should have been so long neg- 
 lected. " We learn to do by doing." Let the teacher 
 keep this fact in mind and act upon it. Whenever 
 a step has been mastered, let it be taught to a class, 
 and confidence in teaching will soon follow. No one 
 refrains from teaching drawing, saying, " I am not an 
 artist," or from teaching reading, because he cannot 
 claim to be an elocutionist, neither should any be 
 deterred from teaching singing because he is not a 
 musician. 
 
 QUALITY OF TONE. 
 
 All exercises should be sung with a 
 soft ^ pure tone of voice, and the ten- 
 dency to anything approaching loud or harsh singing 
 should be nipped in the bud. A soft pattern should 
 be given by the teacher, and pupils encouraged to 
 imitate it. Every music lesson should be commenced 
 with exercises, in developing a good tone of voice 
 This will be found to exert a beneficial influence 
 throughout the entire lesson. See chapter on voice 
 training. 
 
 BEST POSITION FOR SINGING. 
 
 This is undoubtedly standing erect, with the head 
 
 SiNO Softly. 
 
12 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 well kept up, but not thrown back, and the arms 
 hanging easily by the sides. This is not always 
 
 conveniently attainable, owing to the 
 construction of school desks, or nar- 
 
 Sit Easily. 
 
 rowness of the aisles. The next best position ia 
 sitting erect with the hands hanging easily by the 
 sides, or folded loosely and resting on the desks. 
 The weight of the body must not be thrown on the 
 hands while in the latter position. " Arms folded," 
 
 [Avoid " Hands I ^^ " ^^^^^^ behind," should be avoided, 
 Behin d." as both tend to obstruct freedom of 
 
 action of the organs of respiration, which is absolutely 
 indispensable during singing. 
 
 SINGING WITH PUPILS. 
 
 There is always a strong tendency to sing with 
 pupils whenever the slightest difficulty occurs, but 
 this ought not to be indulged. Pupils may be " pulled 
 through " in this manner, but the exercise will fail to 
 
 be of the slightest educational value. 
 
 No sensible teacher would, for a 
 
 Do NOT SiNQ WITH 
 
 Pupils. 
 
 moment, attempt to teach a child to read by simply 
 repeating the lesson with him. In teaching singing, 
 the same laws should be observed as in teaching 
 reading. The teacher should listen, until help is 
 required, then sing while the pupil becomes the 
 listener. 
 
 LEARNING BY IMITATION. 
 
 This is one of the most important features of 
 the Tonic Sol-fa system. Theory and notation are 
 
GENERAL HINTS. I3 
 
 kept in the back-ground as much as possible, while 
 the thing, music, is studied from a pattern given 
 
 by the teacher. Pupils will readily 
 imitate whether the pattern be good 
 
 Avoid Bad Pattern. 
 
 or bad. Teachers should be careful to avoid defec- 
 tive patterning, and should practise in private until 
 sufficient control of voice has been obtained, to 
 secure correctness in intonation and quality of tone 
 in patterning exercises and phrases. 
 
 DIVISION OF LESSON. 
 
 It is impossible to lay down any definite rule 
 regarding length or frequency of lessons. In this 
 matter circumstances must decide what is most 
 advisable. The plan of devoting all the available 
 time to a single weekly lesson is not calculated 
 to produce the best results. The lessons are too 
 long to permit of the interest being kept awake, 
 and the length of interval between lessons entails 
 a strain on the minds of the pupils to remember 
 what has been taught. Where it is possible, a short 
 lesson should be given daily, but when this cannot 
 be done an effort should be made to have the 
 music lesson at least every alternate day. From 
 twenty to thirty minutes daily is the average time 
 that can be spared for music in the public schools. 
 In order to make the most of the time, the lesson 
 should be planned in advance and a specific time 
 
H 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK, 
 
 allotted to each subject. The following- time-table 
 has been put to a practical test and found to work 
 satisfactorily : — 
 
 Voice-training, 
 Modulator drill - 
 Sight- singing, - 
 Time, - - - - 
 Ear-training, - 
 Practice of pieces, 
 
 3 
 
 minutes 
 
 5 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 / - 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 3° 
 
 minutes 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE rmTDAMEirTAL PBINCIPLES OF THE TONIC SOL-FA 
 
 SYSTEM. 
 
 Music is broadly divided into two branches, viz. : 
 Tunf' and Time. Each subject is taught separately, 
 in accordance with the true principle of teaching " one 
 thing at a time." 
 
 TUNE. 
 
 The Key Tone. 
 
 All tones are studied in their relation 
 to a governing tone or key-tone called 
 the Tonic, irrespective of their position in the scale 
 of abs mte pitch. Each tone of the scale has a dis- 
 tinct character or mental effect by which it can be 
 recognized in any key. The appreciation of mental 
 
 effect is the most powerful aid to a 
 clear conception of the tones of the 
 
 Mental Effect. 
 
 scale, without which it is impossible to sing in tune. 
 
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES. 1 5 
 
 When a true conception of the mental effect of tones 
 has been formed, the singer is enabled to sing with a 
 degree of definiteness and accuracy, not easily ob- 
 tained by any method of what is commonly termed 
 " singing by interval." 
 
 MENTAL EFFECTS. (MAJOR MODE.) 
 TE —Sharp. Piercing. 
 LAH — Sad. Weeping. 
 SOH— Grand. Bright. Bold. 
 FAH— Gloomy. Desolate. Grave. 
 ME — Gentle. Calm. Peaceful. 
 
 RAY— Rousing. Hopeful. 
 
 DOH— Firm. Restful. 
 
 These approximate descriptions of mental effect 
 are only true of the tones of the scale when sung 
 slowly ; when the ear is filled with the key ; and when 
 the effect is not modified by harmony. • 
 
 MANUAL SIGNS. 
 
 A set of manual signs have been devised which 
 enables the teacher to face the class while giving an 
 indication of the tones desired to be sung. By com- 
 paring the diagram of manual signs (page 6), it will 
 be seen that each sign gives a suggestive picture of 
 the mental effect of the tone which it represents. 
 They have been found invaluable as a means of 
 concentrating attention in teaching time ; and so 
 strong is their mnemonic power, that pupils will often 
 
/ 
 
 1 6 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 sing, by their aid, difficult intervals, when other 
 means have failed. It must be observed, however, 
 that they are simply a means to an end, and the 
 error of usin^ them to the exclusion of the modulator 
 and blackboard must be avoided. 
 
 The major scale is treated as being the same in all 
 keys, and has but one representation for one thing, 
 
 viz. : the initial letters of each note. 
 The following example is written in 
 
 One Scale. 
 
 the key of C, but should it be desired in the key of 
 E, all that is necessary is to substitute E for C and 
 change the pitch of the key-tone ; the notation will 
 remain unchanged : — 
 
 Key C. 
 
 Key E. 
 
 d :m If :m.r|d :t 
 
 d :m If :m.r|d :ti |d :— 11 
 
 The tone:: are introduced chordally, not diatonically. 
 This is the method which best ac- 
 cords with the harmony of nature. 
 
 CHOKaAL Treatment, 
 
 Tones are niore easily sung when arranged chordally, 
 i. ^., in groups composed of a tone with its third and 
 fifth, (d m s) (f i d') (s t r') and by this means pupils 
 are trained to smg wide intervals from the outset. 
 The practice of singing intervals stepwise only is 
 productive of uncertainty in reading at sight, and is 
 narrowing in its effect. The principle of tuning 
 instruments by chord has been followed by musicians 
 for centuries, and recognized as the only true means 
 
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 n 
 
 of securing perfection in tuning; but John Curwen, 
 the founder of the Tonic Sol-fa system, was the first 
 to make a practical application of the principle to the 
 teaching of vocal music. 
 
 The tonic chord (d m s), the most common chord 
 in music, is composed of the strongest tones of the 
 scale, consequently is the first in order of introduction. 
 
 TIME. 
 
 Time is taught apart from Tune^ the exercises in 
 time only being sung on a monotone. 
 
 The successful teaching of time depends largely on 
 the recognition of three great facts, viz. : 
 The existence of pulses in music. 
 The regularity of pulses. 
 The accent of pulses and consequent grouping 
 into measures. 
 
 If pupils be requested to clap hands 
 while a lively tune is being sung, 
 
 Existence of 
 Pulses. 
 
 it will be observed that their beats will be almost 
 exactly alike, and will seem to fit into some element 
 of the tune. This element is termed the pu/se of the 
 tune. 
 
 In any one tune, these pulses will be 
 found to be regular in recurrence and 
 
 Rnuurity of 
 Pulses. 
 
 duration, although in some tunes they move faster 
 than in others. 
 
 aooent and 
 Measure. 
 
 As in poetry, the accents are of vari- 
 ous degrees of strength, so also in 
 music. The regular recurrence of the strong pulse 
 divides the music into measures. When every 
 
l8 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 alternate pulse is strong, there will be two pulses in 
 each measure, and when the strong pulse is followed 
 by two weak pulses, there will be three pulses in 
 each measure. 
 
 Example 
 
 TWO-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 
 
 1st Measure. 
 
 2nd Measure. 3rd Measure. 
 
 4th Measure. 
 
 ' ! 1 
 
 ' : ^r : ^ 
 
 1 : 
 
 1 
 
 Strong. Weak. 
 
 Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. 
 THREE-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 Strong. 
 
 Weak. 
 
 Ist Measure. 
 
 2nd Measure. 
 
 3rd Measure 
 
 . 
 
 1 : : 
 
 1 : : 1 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 1 
 
 Strong. Weak. Weak. Strong. Weak. Weak. Strong. Weak. Weak. 
 
 Unit of Time. 
 
 The pulse is the natural unit of time, 
 and by it the length of all tones is 
 
 calculated. Thus tones are said to be one pulse, 
 
 three pulses or half-a-pulse in length. 
 
 The advantages of the Tonic Sol-fa notation of 
 time cannot be overrated. A refer- 
 ence to the above diagram will show 
 
 Pictorial Notation 
 OF Time. 
 
 that it gives prominence to the three principal facts 
 referred to : each pulse being separately indicated, 
 represented of equal length, and the various degrees 
 of accent marked by specific signs. The following 
 will serve still further to illustrate the unique charac- 
 ter of this pictorial notation of time : — 
 
 Whole-pulse tones, . . Id :d Id :d 11 
 
 Two-pulse tones, ..Id : — Id : — 
 
 li 
 
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 Half-pulse tones, Id .d :d .d Id .d 
 
 Quarter-pulse tones, .|d,d.d,d'.d,d'd>d| d 
 
 «9 
 
 Pulse-and-half tones, I d 
 
 :- .d Id 
 
 d .d 
 
 II 
 
 -.d 
 
 The notes which occupy a full space are one pulse 
 in length ; the dash ( — ) prolongs a tone into the 
 following pulse ; the dot placed in the centre of a 
 pulse divides it into halves, and the comma divides 
 the halves into quarters. The dash followed by a 
 dot lengthens the tone by one half pulse. In the 
 more intricate divisions of the pulse the pictorial 
 character of the notation is preserved throughout. 
 
 TIME NAMES. 
 
 In order to convey a correct impression of the 
 rhythmic divisions of the pulse, various "time names" 
 are employed. These are exceedingly useful in intro- 
 ducing any new division of the pulse, as they establish, 
 in the mind, an association of syllable and rhythm^ 
 in the same manner as Sol-fa names establish an 
 association of syllable and interval. For full explana- 
 tion of time names see page 48. 
 
 FINGER-SIGNS FOR TIME. 
 
 Some teachers use finger-signs for teaching time, 
 but we do not recommend them except as an alterna- 
 tive means of illustration with very young pupils. 
 For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
 them, a diagram is provided on page 7. 
 
ao THE tlacher's handbook. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE VOICE. 
 
 "Man has sought out many inventions," and has 
 exercised wonderful ingenuity in the devising and 
 constructing of many beautiful and apparently perfect 
 musical instruments, but far above the works of man 
 stands a beautiful and perfect instrument of wondrous 
 mechanism, supplied to every individual by the Divine 
 Maker, who planned it — the human voice. Among 
 the many instruments made by man, there is not one 
 which receives so little care and cultivation, or has 
 experienced so much neglect as the human voice. 
 
 Many attempts have been ,made to compare the 
 voice to a mechanical instrument, but when pushed 
 to a legitimate conclusion every one has completely 
 broken down. For the purposes of illustration, no ons 
 will serve our purpose better than the reed organ. In 
 
 it we have the three essentials of 
 vocal tone ; viz., bellows, vibrator. 
 
 Three Essentials 
 of the voioe. 
 
 }'.*■--:. 
 
 and resonator. In the organ, the wind is supplied to 
 the vibrators by the bellows, and according to the 
 pressure of wind from the bellows will the tone be 
 soft or loud, and any irregularity of pressure will 
 result in unsteadiness of tone. In the organ the vibra- 
 tor is composed of steel reeds of various lengths, 
 which, being set in motion by the wind from the bel- 
 lows, emit a steady musical tone. The resonator is 
 
THE VOICE. 
 
 21 
 
 composed of sounding boards and hollow boxes, and 
 likewise of the case of the instrument as a whole. 
 
 In the human voice, the bellows are 
 represented by the lungs. These are 
 
 The BEU.OWS. 
 
 enclosed in the chest, which they fit exactly, and of 
 which they occupy by far the largest portion, leaving 
 but a small place for the heart. They are two in 
 number, and are much wider at the bottom than at 
 the top. 
 
 Underneath the lungs is the midriff or diaphragm, 
 a muscular, movable partition by which the lungs are 
 
 separated from the abdomen. It is 
 
 The Diaphraqm 
 
 J 
 
 arched upwards like an inverted basin, 
 and when its muscular fibres contract, it flattens and 
 descends, thus increasing the capacity of the chest at 
 the expense of that of the abdomen. 
 
 Respiration consists of two acts, viz., inspiration 
 and expiration. Inspiration may be produced in three 
 different ways : — 
 
 (i) By pushing the chest forward and flattening the 
 midriff, so as to compel the lungs to descend^ and to 
 increase in volume, in order to fill the empty space 
 created by this movement 
 
 (2) By extending the ribs sideways. 
 
 (3) By drawing up the upper parts of the chest, viz., 
 the collar-bones and shoulder blades. 
 
 We will term these (i) Midriff breathing ; (2) Rib 
 breathing ; (3) Collar-bone breathing. 
 
 Collar-bone breathing is to be con- 
 demned, and should never be used. 
 
 collar-bohe 
 Breathihq Ihjurious 
 
 It utilizes only the thin upper parts of the lungs, 
 
22 THK teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 which cannot contain as much air as the broad under 
 parts ; and, as all the parts surrounding the upper 
 region of the lungs are hard and unyielding, much 
 fatigue is occasioned by their use. Midriff and rib- 
 Midriff and Rib- I breathing combined forms at once 
 Breathing de8irable.| the most natural and easy method of 
 Dreathing, and should be diligently practised by all. 
 
 The Vibrator is formed by two chords or bands 
 called the vocal ligaments. These are enclosed in the 
 larynx, or voice box, commonly called Adam's Apple.* 
 
 To give anything like a full description of these liga- 
 ments would necessitate much more space than is 
 available, consequently we will merely analyze the 
 results of their action. Sound " middle C " of the 
 
 II piano and sing downivards^ when a 
 \ change will be experienced m the 
 larynx and a difference in quality of tone will be at 
 once apparent, when A is sounded. This is caused by 
 a change in the method in which the ligaments are 
 made to vibrate. Continuing downwards no other 
 alterations will be experienced. Starting from C and 
 singing upwards other, changes will be felt between 
 E and F, and between B and C ; still another change 
 takes place between A' and B', but the register above 
 is not found in adult male voices. The term register 
 has been given to each series of notes produced by 
 one mechanism, and the voice has been classified as 
 follows : — 
 
 * For full information, see " The Mechanism of the Human 
 Voice," by Behnke. (Curwen & Sons, London, Eng.) 
 
I'HE VOICE. 23 
 
 TABLE OF THE AVERAGE COMPASS OF THE REGISTERS, 
 
 C 
 
 B 
 
 A 
 
 G' 
 -F' 
 
 E' 
 -D' 
 
 C 
 
 ■} 
 
 SMALL. 
 
 A 
 — G 
 
 F 
 — E 
 
 D 
 
 C 
 
 B, 
 —A, 
 
 G, 
 — F. 
 
 E| 
 — D, 
 
 C, 
 —B, 
 
 A, 
 ■G, 
 
 F, 
 
 UPPER THIN. 
 
 ■ LOWER THIN. 
 
 UPPER THICK. 
 
 LOWER THICK. 
 
 The names thick^ thitiy and small are given on 
 account of the manner in which the vocal ligaments 
 vibrate. In the thick registers, they vibrate through- 
 out their whole thickness^ but in the thin register, only 
 the thin inner edges of the vocal ligai.:ents are in 
 vibration, and in the small register, only a small 
 portion of the ligaments are in vibration. 
 
 The forcing of any of these registers upwards past 
 the above limits is highly injurious, but they can be 
 extended downwards without injury, and ought to 
 be cultivated downwards until they blend with the 
 register immediately underneath. 
 
 The Resonator is formed by the upper part of the 
 throat and the mouth. To illustrate the functions 
 of the resonator, take an ordinary violin string, stretch 
 over an ordinary deal box, and set i*- in vibration. 
 
24 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 A musical sound will certainly be produced, but poor 
 in comparison with that which will be heard with the 
 same string stretched over a violin. There is no 
 difference in the vibrator — the string — but there is 
 a great difference in the resonator. In the same way, 
 let a person sing with the teeth nearly close together, 
 the lips drawn over the teeth, the tongue arched 
 upwards, and the breath kept back in the mouth, and 
 we get a tone as poor in quality as any combination 
 of salt box and fiddle string can make. But let the 
 mouth be well opened and the voice directed well 
 forward in the mouth, and we get a tone equally pure 
 with that of the finest violin. 
 
 To produce a steady tone, and gain proper control 
 of the breath, breathing exercises must be practised 
 until a fair command of the lungs is obtained. 
 
 To produce correctly, tones of any pitch, we must 
 study the action of the vibrator, until the registers of 
 the voice are equalized and blended with each other. 
 
 Purity of tone depends largely on the shape of the 
 resonator, the quality changing with the slightest 
 motion of the mouth or throat. 
 
 In order to cultivate pure quality of tone, voice 
 exercises should be practised at the beginning of 
 every music lesson. By this means the attention is 
 confined exclusively to the formation of corre^"^ 
 habits in singing, which are thus kept before the mind 
 throughout the entire lesson. 
 
 \ 
 
MODULATOR DRILL. 2$ 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 MODULATOR BRILL. 
 
 In the Tonic Sol-fa notation the modulator takes the 
 place occupied by the staff in the common notation. 
 Like the staff it gives a pictorial representation of 
 intervals, but with more accurateness than is possible 
 with the staff. The exact intervals between the tones 
 of the scale are clearly shown in the first three steps, 
 and in the following steps the true relation of keys, 
 the most important element in the teaching of sing- 
 ing, is clearly set forth. Modulator drill should form 
 the basis of all teaching to read music, and should 
 occupy a prominent place in every lesson. 
 
 The teacher should have some 
 definite object in view while con- 
 
 Have an Aim. 
 
 ducting modulator drill. Some teachers simply let 
 the pointer wander up and down as fancy may 
 dictate. This is, unquestionably, wrong. The object 
 of the drill should be : 
 
 1st. To familiarize the pupils with the mental effect 
 of the tones, irrespective of the interval by which 
 they are approached. 
 
 2nd. To enable the pupils to gain a clear mental 
 conception of each tone, and to sing them in any 
 desired combination. 
 
 3rd. To give confidence and certainty in points 
 where a weakness- has been found to exist. The 
 
26 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 methods of accomplishing this object are explained 
 under modulator drill in the graded lessons given 
 below. 
 
 Always sing the key-tone as a pattern to your class, 
 and do not commence drill until it has been imitated 
 in correct tune by all. 
 
 If pupils experience a difficulty in singing any 
 tone, do not tell them that they are ainging too 
 high or too low, but appeal to their sense of. mental 
 effect by questioning — Was that bright enough for 
 soh ? Did you sing that firmly enough for doh ? 
 Point definitely to the note you intend should be 
 sung, and move the pointer rapidly to the note 
 which follows. 
 
 Do not allow pupils to sing any tone until you have 
 indicated it. A neglect of this rule will cause con- 
 fusion and induce carelessness and inattention. Pupils 
 will anticipate, but they must be trained to sing the 
 intervals indicated by the teacher, not those which 
 they expect. If a pupil should persist in this, either 
 through carelessness, or eagerness, it will be advisable 
 to request him to stop singing for a little. When one 
 voice sings a wrong tone in advance of the others, 
 they are almost certain to follow, unless accustomed 
 to singing with certainty. 
 
 In order to make modulator drill 
 effective, repetition must be avoided. 
 
 Avoid Repetition. 
 
 Inexperienced teachers frequently fall into the error 
 of pointing to the tones in a loose, careless manner, 
 whereby they unconsciously repeat phrases, and teach 
 
MODUF.ATOR DRILL. 
 
 27 
 
 their pupils to anticipate the tones which follow. 
 Such careless habit should be rigidly guarded against 
 as it only leads to running in grooves, and instead of 
 
 strengthening pupils in reading music, 
 has a decidedly weakening effect. We 
 
 Running in 
 Grooves. 
 
 lave repeatedly seen classes singing apparently diffi- 
 cult exercises from the modulator, while their own 
 teacher pointed, but when led by a stranger they 
 failed completely to sing even the simplest intervals. 
 On such occasions the teacher usually expresses 
 surprise, and asserts that, " they always sing that 
 easily for me," and cei-tainly they do, but only when 
 approached in the one manner to which they are 
 accustomed. We have seen an instance of a class 
 which would invariably sing the first half-dozen tones 
 d PI s PI r d, even though iiaming other tones pointed 
 by the examiner. This was certainly running in 
 grooves with a vengeance. Still, the teacher of the 
 class in question had been trying conscientiously to 
 teach her pupils, and was perfectly satisfied with the 
 results, as they seldom made mistakes while following 
 her pointing. Of course she was unaware that she had 
 been giving only a few tones, continuously repeated, 
 and that her pupils had practically learnt nothing 
 from all the modulator exercises they had sung. In 
 order to avoid the error the teacher SiiOuld memorise 
 
 sections of tunes by various writers, 
 containing a sufficient variety of style, 
 
 How TO Secure 
 Variety. 
 
 and introduce them into the exercises given on the 
 modulator. In the same manner difficult phrases in 
 
28 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 any song* under study may be worked into the 
 exercise with advantage. 
 
 It will also be found of mutual advantage to 
 exchange with another teacher. By this means, both 
 classes are tested by a strange teacher, and any 
 weakness which may exist is quickly discovered. 
 
 It has been said that " the modulator is to the 
 Tonic Sol-fa system as the sun is to the solar system," 
 but this is only true when the modulator is properly 
 used, 
 
 VOCALISING. 
 
 This is the term applied to singing on one voweL 
 The vowel most commonly used is the broad ah^ as it 
 secures the most open quality of tone, and aids 
 correct opening of the mouth while singing. This 
 is sometimes termed laa-ing. Whenever pupils can 
 sing the syllables with any degree of certainty, they 
 should be taught to vocalise from the modulator and 
 hand-signs. This induces concentration, a definite 
 conception of tones, and is an excellent means of 
 mental training. It forms the connecting link be- 
 tween sol-fa-ing and singing to words. Pupils must 
 not be expected to vocalise difficult intervals at first, 
 but should be drilled in singing easy exercises from 
 the modulator, at a slow rate of speed, in order that 
 they may have time to think each tone. When this 
 power of thinking the tones has been developed the 
 syllables may be dispensed with, except in cases of 
 exceptional difficulty. 
 
SIGHT-SINGING. 
 
 29 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 sioHT-snronro. 
 
 Thorough systematic drill in sight-singing should 
 "OnE Thing at a I ^^^^ ^^ important part of every lesson. 
 Time." | During the earlier lessons it will be 
 
 found advisable to write the notes on the blackboard 
 without any regard to rhythm, in order that undivided 
 attention may be given to the difficulties of tune. 
 
 As in modulator drill, repetition or running in 
 grooves must be carefully avoided. In order to 
 secure variety, extracts from songs which are un- 
 familiar may be taken and interspersed with phrases 
 of the teacher's own composition 
 
 As a rule, the exercises should be short and to 
 the point Long exercises containing 
 difficult intervals are dry and unin- 
 
 Short Exercises 
 ARE Preferable. 
 
 teresting, and are productive of little else than list- 
 lessness and restlessness. On the contrary, when 
 short exercises, containing each a single difficulty, are 
 used, the interest can be sustained for a much longer 
 period. At the successful termination of each exercise 
 there is a feeling that something has been accom- 
 plished, some difficulty overcome, and fresh difficulties 
 are attacked with vigor and certainty. 
 
 Individualizing should be encouraged from the 
 earliest lessons. At first nervousness 
 and timidity will prevent pupils from 
 
 Cultivate 
 Individual Sinoinq. 
 
 volunteering to sing in presence of their classmates, 
 
30 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 but a little discreet persuasion will soon convince 
 them that individual singing is no more difficult than 
 individual reading. Until a sufficient degree of con- 
 fidence has been developed, it will be necessary to 
 have the exercise sung by the entire class before being 
 sung by individual pupils. When this stage has been 
 reached, individual sight-singing may be attempted. 
 While one pupil is reading the exercise, the others 
 will be watching closely and eagerly listening for 
 mistakes. This will be found an excellent means of 
 cultivating habits of observance and attention in 
 sight-singing. 
 
 Whenever an exercise has been satisfactorily sung 
 on any one key, change the key, giving the sound of 
 
 the new doh firmly, and repeat the 
 exercise. Pupils should be trained to 
 
 Change Key 
 Frequently. 
 
 sing in any key from the outset. Exercises which 
 strain the compass of the young voices must not be 
 attempted. . 
 
 In primary classes it will be necessary to use the 
 syllables almost exclusively at first, but the power to 
 vocalise, i. e.y sing on one vowel-sound, should be de- 
 veloped simultaneously. Pupils may sol-fa an exer- 
 cise easily, but unless they can afterwards vocalise, or 
 sing it to words, the exercise will not be productive 
 of the best practical results. Exercises containing 
 exceptional difficulties should not be introduced unless 
 there is a certainty that the pupils have sufficient 
 ability to overcome them successfully. No fixed rule 
 can be given for grading the difficulty of exercises in 
 sight-singing for all classes, but the following will be 
 
 ■:-i-\-- 
 
TIME. 31 
 
 found useful as a test. If pupils cannot vocalise an 
 exercise after having sol-faed it three times, it may 
 be safely assumed that it is too difficult. The inter- 
 vals with which the difficulty has been experienced, 
 should then be carefully studied from the modulator 
 before being again introduced into the sight-singing 
 exercises. 
 
 The use of colors in writing the exercises will be 
 found helpful in many ways. They serve to recall the 
 mental effects of the tones by comparison and contrast, 
 and also concentrate the attention on the difficulties 
 to be overcome. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 TIME. 
 
 In children the feeling of rhythm is instinctive and 
 usually active. When a lively air is heard it will be 
 
 noticed that children invariably in- 
 cline to mark time in some way or 
 
 Instinctive 
 Feeunq of Rhythm. 
 
 other ; it may be by stamping with the feet, nodding 
 the head, clapping hands, or, if at liberty to do so, by 
 marching in time with the music. Notwithstanding 
 this fact, the number of classes in which " singing out 
 of time " predominates, is largely in excess of those 
 in which singing in strict time is the rule. 
 
 Several theories have been offered in explanation, 
 all of which are more or less correct. One is, that 
 
32. THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 pupils are not all of the same temperament, and those 
 who are of a lively temperament will naturally incline 
 to sing faster than those of a dull, sluggish disposition. 
 This is certainly true, but when pupils are trained to 
 take the rate of movement from the teacher's baton, 
 all such individualities ought to be subordinate to the 
 will of the teacher. This should be , insisted upon 
 from the most elementary lesson. 
 
 We are of opinion that the true cause of failure in 
 teaching rhythm will be found in the unconscious 
 habit, which many teachers have formed, of teaching 
 mathematics of time, while the thing itself has been 
 left untouched. In examination papers in music, 
 
 we have frequently met with such 
 questions as the following : " How 
 many eighth-notes are contained in a dotted whole- 
 note ? " and have found pupils who could answer such 
 questions correctly, but who could not tell the differ- 
 ence between the rhythm in " Old Hundredth " and 
 "God Save the Queen," except on paper. Such 
 examples of neglect of the precept which demands 
 that " the thing before the sign " should be taught, 
 are unfortunately by no m.eans rare. In teaching 
 time, it will be found advisable to develop the rhythm 
 by listening to ear exercises, and tapping the pulses 
 (see page 17), until a clear conception of the rhythm 
 
 El has been formed. When this has 
 YE- RAiNiN . been satisfactorily accomplished, the 
 
 Mathematics mis- 
 taken FOR Rhythm. 
 
 pupils will be enabled to give undivided attention to 
 the training of the eye in reading the notation of 
 time. 
 
TIME. 33 
 
 In order to test the instinctive feeling of rhythm, 
 let the teacher mark the pulses, by tapping lightly, 
 while singing one or two measures containing intri- 
 cate divisions of the pulse. If this be sung on one 
 tone, it will be found that a majority of the pupils 
 will imitate correctly whatever phrase has been sung. 
 This experiment proves that there is little difficulty 
 in singing certain intricacies of rhythm, but recognis- 
 ing them in musical notation, and knowing when to 
 sing them is a very different matter. In the ordinary 
 or staff notation of music this is a matter of consider- 
 able difficulty, and though it has been simplified to a 
 great extent in the Tonic Sol-fa notation, careful 
 attention to eye-training is absolutely indispensable. 
 The most common cause of difficulty is to be found 
 in irregular beating of pulses in the 
 elementary lessons. Teachers should 
 
 Regularity of 
 Beatinq Pulses. 
 
 be careful to point to the accent marks only when con- 
 ducting exercises in rhythm, and never on any 
 account to the notes, dots or commas contained within 
 the pulse. The following will serve to illustrate the 
 proper and improper methods of pointing. The * 
 denotes the position of the pointer at each successive 
 tap : — 
 
 impwr id :r .r I m :- .r I d :ti .ti i d :- 
 
 Method. |» ♦»'• *|* •♦• 
 
 Proper I d :r .r | PI :- .r I d :ti .ti | d :— 
 
 Method. ' ' " 
 
 Should the above improper method of pointing to 
 pulses be followed, it will be impossible to secure 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
j^ THE teacher's HANDBOOK 
 
 correctness in singing in time. In writing on the 
 blackboard it will be found advantageous to use 
 
 colored crayons for the pulse signa- 
 tures. By this means they are made 
 
 Colored Crayons 
 Advantaqcous. 
 
 to stand out distinctly from the notes, (which are 
 written with white), and the eye is unconsciously 
 directed to the sign for each pulse as it is felt or heard. 
 In teaching rhythm all exercises should be sung on 
 a monotone. This does not necessarily imply that 
 only one note should be used, Many teachers make 
 the mistake of using only one note, as follows : — 
 
 Id :d.d|d :- Id.dtd.dld :- 
 
 or. 
 
 II :1 .111 :- 11.1 :1 .1 11 :- 11 
 
 The first example is certainly preferable to the 
 second, but both fail in one important respect, viz., 
 
 eye-training. We have followed the 
 above method for years, but have 
 
 Use more than One 
 Note in Writing. 
 
 been compelled to abandon its use for the more 
 rational one of presenting the notation as nearly as 
 possible as it is likely to be met with in singing real 
 tunes. Examples of tunes consisting of a monotone 
 are exceedingly rare. If pupils are trained to sing 
 any new division of rhythm from a notation of one 
 note only, they experience a difficulty in recognizing 
 the same division in an unfamiliar melody. In order 
 to overcome this difficulty, we have adopted the 
 plan of changing the notes with every pulse, which 
 presents the notation in its true form and trains the 
 
TIME. 35 
 
 pupils to recognize it more readily when singing at 
 sight. In pursuance of this plan the above exercise 
 would be written — 
 
 1' 
 
 d :n.n|8 :— Is.siw.nld 
 
 and would be taught first by using the time-names, 
 then naming the syllables, on one tone^ and finally 
 singing the syllables in tune. 
 
 THE NOTATION OF TIME. 
 
 In a previous chapter reference was made to the 
 educational advantage of the Tonic Sol-fa notation 
 of time, in presenting a picture of the relative length 
 of each tone, and clearly indicating each variation 
 of accent. 
 
 . MusiCj like poetry, is characterised by a regularity 
 of rhythm and accent To this fact we owe much of 
 the pleasure which we derive from music ; it may be 
 
 in the mere jingle of a minstrel ballad 
 or the elevating strains of a grand 
 
 Reovlamtyof 
 Rhythm. 
 
 oratorio. The influence of rhythm in music is all- 
 powerful ; but without it music would sound insipid 
 and dull. Let the following familiar tune be sung 
 with the strong accent on each note marked with 
 a A and notice the effect 
 
 Kby F St. Petbr. 
 
 A AAA A A A 
 
 Bd'tlssfnnrdfnr 
 
 : nfnlssfmdPirdtid 
 
 ^'' It will be apparent that the tune is altered almost 
 beyond recognition by this simple change of accent. 
 
3« 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 By simply putting the accent on the second note ai^d 
 every alternate note following, the tune will be re- 
 stored to its original form. ' 
 
 In the Tonic Sol-fa notation, j*ro- 
 vision is made for three gradations of 
 
 AOOENTI. 
 
 accent, viz., strongs medium^ and weak. The Jk.gns 
 employed to represent these are 
 
 Strong I A relatively long upright line. 
 
 Medium | A relatively short upri>;nt line. 
 Weak : A colon. 
 
 I .1 
 
 MEASURE. 
 
 The strong accents recur at regular intervals and 
 divide the music into measures, A measure is the 
 space from one strong accent to the next strong accent. 
 
 In writing, the signs for the various pulses are 
 placed at equal distances apart, and thus present to 
 the eye a picture of the equal length of the pulses as 
 recognized by the ear. Too much care cannot be 
 observed in this particular, as an exercise in which 
 
 the pulses are represented as of un- 
 equal length is misleading, and is 
 
 Pulse Siqns Should 
 BE Equivalent. 
 
 invariably sung in a halting and jerky manner. 
 
 The most common cause of this error is the habit of 
 writing the notes and the pulse signs simultaneously. 
 
 In order to avoid this, the signs for 
 the strong pulses should first be writ- 
 
 How TO Write. 
 
 ten, then the measures divided into pulses, and finally 
 
iimk; 37 
 
 the notes inserted in their respective i)laces, moder- 
 ately close to the pulse sign which ptece-fes them. 
 
 Example: — * 
 
 (") 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 1 
 
 
 II 
 
 w 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 II 
 
 w 
 
 
 : 1 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 w 
 
 1" 
 
 :r.r n 
 
 :r.r d 
 
 :t|.t| d :— 
 
 1 
 
 The above process may, on first sight, be considered 
 rather slow, but on trial it will be found to take less 
 time and secure better results than the haphazard 
 method previously mentioned. ■ ^ ■ . 
 
 Measures are broadly divided into 
 two forms, viz., (/up/e and in'p/e. 
 
 Forms of Measure. 
 
 In iiu/>/e measure every alternate pulse is accented. 
 In triple measure every third pulse is accented. 
 Two-pulse measure is the simplest duple form. 
 
 TWO-PULSE MEASURE. : • > ' 
 
 II 
 
 Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. Strong. Weak. 
 
 Three-pulse measure is the simplest triple form. 
 
 " ' THREE-PULSE MEASURE. 'i' ' ! ^U;i 
 
 f .v:,.: I = = M • ll 
 
 Strong. Weak. Weak. Strong. Weak. Weak. Strong. Weak Weak. 
 
 Occasionally the second pulse in three pulse-meas- 
 ure is sung with a medium accent, but it is always 
 written as above. , 
 
38 THE teacher's* HANDBOOK. 
 
 FOUR-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 jl : I : I : f : || 
 
 Strong. Weak. Medium. Weak. Strong, \yeak. Medlama. Weak. 
 
 This is the most common of all forms of measure, 
 and on this account is often termed " common time." 
 The difference between tho medium and strong 
 accents is very slight, and by many performers both 
 are made of equal importance. 
 
 SIX-PULSB MEASURE. 
 
 Strong. Weak. Weak. Medium. Weak. Weak. 
 
 This is sometimes termed double-triple measure, 
 and it is important to note that it is composed of two 
 sets of three pulses, not thrse sets of two pulses. 
 
 NINE-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 H : : I : : I : : j| 
 
 This is composed of three sets of three pulses each. 
 It is not v«^ry commonly used, except in extended 
 compositi' -1^ 
 
 TWELVE-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 II : : I : : I : : I : : II 
 
 This is composed of four' sets of threes, and like 
 the previous form is not commonly used. Neither is 
 likely to be found in compositions for school classes. 
 
 The double line at the end of the examples must 
 not be mistaken for a pulse sign. It is used solely to 
 denote the end of a complete piece of music, or 
 section of such. 
 
 - ' . 
 
TIME. 
 
 39 
 
 The bracket { denotes the end of a printed h*ne or 
 score, and may include one or more parts. When 
 several parts are included within the ( they are 
 intended to be sung simultaneously by voices divided 
 into a corresponding number of parts. In writing, 
 (unless where a silent pulse follows) a line should 
 never end with a pulse sign, as 
 
 ||d :m.d |b :m ir :d.r |m :d | 
 
 B :f m |r :m.f|m :r |d :— 11 
 
 but should have the pulse sign placed at the begin- 
 ning of the succeeding line. The reason for this is 
 that a pulse mark denotes the degree of accent to be 
 given to the note which it immediately precedes, 
 hence the pulse sign should not be in one line while 
 the note is in another. 
 
 When a piece of music commences 
 on the strong accent, as shown in 
 
 Secondary 
 Measures. 
 
 above examples, it is said to be in Primary measure^ 
 and when it commences on any other than the strong 
 pulse it is said to be in Secondary measure. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF SECONDARY MEASURES. 
 
 r 
 
 Two-pulse 
 Three-pulse 
 
 Four-pulse | 
 Six-pulse ( 
 
 II 
 
 : I 
 
 B 
 
40 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 The criterion of a pulse is held to be that place in 
 a piece of music where we instinctively beat time. 
 
 If a piece of music be performed 
 alternately slowly and quickly, it will 
 
 Rapid Movement 
 OF Pulses. 
 
 36 found that in the latter case the stronger accents 
 only will impress themselves sufficiently to be recog- 
 nised as pulses, and the former pulses will be consid- 
 ered simply as sub-divisions of the new pulses. The 
 most frequent use of this method is to be found in 
 connection with six-pulse measure. When sung 
 
 rapidly this will appear to be two- 
 pulse measure, with pulses divided 
 
 Beatinq Twke in a 
 Measure. 
 
 into thirds. In beating time the beats will fall only 
 on the strong and medium accents, thus : — 
 
 II 
 
 When it is intended that a piece of music should 
 be sung in this way, directions as to beating time are 
 given. " Beating twice in a measure," "beating twice," 
 or more frequently only the word " twice " is used to 
 denote the method of marking the pulses. 
 
 In quick nine-pulse measure the pulses are beat 
 " thrice in a measure," and are expressed as above, 
 the word " thrice " being substituted for " twice." 
 
 In order to denote the rate of speed 
 at which pulses are intended to move 
 
 Metronome Rate. 
 
 in a given tune, Metronome marks are placed at the 
 beginning, or at any point where a change in the rate 
 of movement is desired. Metronome is the name 
 
/ ■ 
 
 TIME. 41 
 
 applied to an instrument which marks the pulses at 
 various desired rates of movement. Metronome 60, 
 abbreviated M. 60, denotes that sixty beats of the 
 Metronome are to be given in one minute. 
 
 Practically the M. may be taken to mean minute, 
 thus M. 60, M. 70, M. 84, denotes that the number of 
 pulses indicated are to occupy one minute. 
 
 M. 60 TWICE. ' 
 • • I • • • 
 
 il 
 
 This indicates that the pulses are beat twice in each 
 measure, moving at the rate of sixty pulses in the 
 minute. 
 
 The more elaborate metronomes are supplied with 
 a clock-work arrangement, and pendulum with sliding 
 weight, which regulates the rate of movement accord- 
 ing to a given scale. By means of a series of tooth- 
 and-pinion wheels the pulses are ticked audibly, and 
 some have a bell attachment which strikes the accen- 
 ted pulses also. Such instruments are rather expen- 
 sive for general use, and a cheaper form of instrument 
 is necessary. What is known as the "tape-and- 
 weight" m'='^ronome will be found to answer all ordin- 
 ary purposes. This is easily made by attaching a 
 
 weight to the end of an ordinary tape 
 measure. This may be held in the' 
 
 How TO MAKE A 
 
 Metronome. 
 
 land, or suspended from any convenient peg, and 
 when in motion each co^nplete vibration will correspond 
 to a pulse. 
 
 The following table gives the number of inches of 
 the tape required for the different rates of movement. 
 
42 
 
 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 The number of inches here given is not absolutely 
 correct, but is near enough for ordinary purposes : — 
 
 M. 50 Tape 56 inches. 
 
 «( 
 
 (( 
 
 (C 
 
 47 
 38 
 
 31 
 
 27 
 
 24 
 21 
 
 17 
 
 13^ 
 
 M. 56 
 
 M. 60 " 
 
 M. 66 " 
 
 M. 72 
 M. 76 
 
 M. 80 " 
 
 M. 88 »♦ 
 
 M. 96 " 
 
 M. 120 " 
 
 In order to gain some idea of the respective rates 
 of movement, it is advisable to memorize one distinct 
 rate, and adopt it as a standard by which to compare 
 all others. M. 60 will be found most serviceable for 
 this purpose. When this rate has once been fixed in 
 the mind, it will be an easy matter to think of M. 1 20 
 as being twice as rapid, M. 90 one half quicker, and 
 the intermediate rates in proportion. 
 
 BEATING TIME. 
 
 Various methods of beating time are employed as : 
 
 1. Tapping the blackboard while pointing to the pulse- 
 
 signs of the tune being sung. 
 
 2. Tapping the pulses audibly without pointing to the 
 
 pulse-signs. 
 
 3. Stamping with the feet 
 
 4. Simply marking the pulses by a clearly defined 
 
 movement of the pointer or baton. 
 
TIME. 43 
 
 The first two methods are necessary in conducting 
 elementary exercises, in which the pupils' attention is 
 concentrated on the notation, but should be dispensed 
 with as soon as possible. 
 
 The third method is unquestionably bad, and has 
 not one single redeeming feature to recommend it. 
 When indulged in, it induces loud and harsh singing 
 with consequent forcing of voices. Teachers should 
 discourage its use on the part of their pupils, and 
 should avoid setting a bad example. 
 
 Note. — This is easier said than done. 
 
 The fourth method is the best of all. Pupils should 
 be thoroughly trained to watch the beat, and no 
 exercise or song should be considered well taught 
 until it has been sung in accordance with the silent 
 movements of the teacher's baton ; in this respect the 
 teacher must be an autocrat, by whose will every 
 pupil must submit to be governed. 
 
 The ordinary forms of beating time are as follows : 
 
 TWO-PULSE MEASURE. THREE-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 • Weak. Weak. 
 
 UP. ^^' 
 
 DOWN « 
 
 Strong. Strong. Weak. 
 
44 I'HE tkacher's handbook. 
 
 . FOUR-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 Weak. LBPtT^vM RIGHT Medium. 
 DOWM 
 
 Strong. 
 
 SIX-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 Down, left, left, right, right, up. 
 
 Sometimes this is beat as for two three-pulse meas- 
 ures. When quicky beat as for two-pulse measure, 
 
 NINE-PULSE MEASURE. 
 
 Commonly treated as three-pulse measure. 
 In beating time, the baton should move quickly, 
 and definitely to a "point of rest" at the extremity 
 
 of each beat The tendency ta in- 
 dulge in cutting ornamental figures 
 
 Mark Time 
 Definitely. 
 
 should be carefully avoided. This style of conducting 
 is unfortunately too common. It may seem to be 
 pretty enough when viewed by an audience of specta- 
 tors, but the teacher must remember that Jie conducts, 
 not for the audiencey but for the singers. No style of 
 marking time can rivet the attention of the singers so 
 well as the plain geometrical movement of the baton 
 indicated above. In order to define the rate bf move- 
 ment, it is advisable to beat a silent measure before 
 
TIME. 
 
 45 
 
 the singers commence. As a rule this should begin 
 on the first pulse of the measure, and should the piece 
 begin on a secondary measure the voices will enter 
 when due. 
 
 LENGTH OF TONES. 
 
 All duration values are calculated from the pulse 
 as a unit. A note placed between any two pulse- 
 signs is one pulse in length, unless followed by some 
 qualifying sign. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 Id :s |m :d Ir :ti Id :d 
 
 Each note in the above is one pulse in length. 
 When a tone is continued or prolonged, a continuation 
 mark ( — ) is written in the pulse or pulses through 
 which it is intended to be continued. 
 
 Example :- 
 
 d :- Is 
 
 n 
 
 In the above, d and s are each two pulses, and m 
 is four pulses in length. In writing 
 the notation, the continuation mark 
 
 Continuation 
 Marks. 
 
 should be placed equidistant from the dots of the 
 colon, or opposite the centre of the upright bars, but , 
 must not touch either. See above example. 
 
 The Tonic Sol-fa notation gives a common-sense 
 
 representation of silence or rests. 
 
 Where there is nothing to be sung, 
 
 Rests. 
 
 nothing is represented, consequently no signs what- 
 
' /, 
 
 46 THE teacher's handbook 
 
 ever are used to denote silences. . The number of 
 pulses or fraction of pulses which is left empty denotes 
 the duration of the silence or rest 
 
 Example : — 
 
 d :m Is : I :n id :— 
 
 In the above the third and fourth pulses being 
 empty, denotes a two-pulse silence. 
 
 Pulses are divided into fractions by 
 signs placed between the pulse sig^ns. 
 
 Division of 
 Pulses. 
 
 A dot placed in the middle of a pulse, on* a level with 
 the lower dot of the colon, divides the pulse into 
 halves. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 d :d.r |pi :r.d|r :d.ti |d :— 
 
 The Yi shows the notes which are half a pulse in 
 length. Notes are frequently continued for one half 
 pulse only ; such continuation is represented by a 
 short continuation mark. 
 
 Example :- 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 d : - .r 
 
 n :- .r d :- 
 
 .t, d 
 
 * 
 
 • 
 % • 
 
 II 
 
 Pulses are divided into quarters by placing a 
 comma in the middle of each half-pulse. 
 
 Example :- 
 
 ■X 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 1"^ 
 
 :r,ni,s 1 
 
 :s,f .n,r d 
 
 V XX XX 
 
 • 
 
 t: 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 <i 
 
\. 
 
 TIME. 47 
 
 Combinations of halves and quarters are represent- 
 ed as follows : — 
 
 HALF AND TWO QUARTERS. 
 
 :r .m,f|8 :b .f,m| 
 
 :r .m,r|d :— 
 
 r 
 
 TWO QUARTERS AND HALF. 
 
 d :r,m.f |s :s,f.n 
 
 X H 'A -A -A 7z 
 
 1/ u u 
 
 r :r,m.r |d 
 
 %%yz 
 
 In representing the division of the pulse into three- 
 quarters and quarter, a slight deviation has been made 
 from the consistency of the notation, as explained 
 above. Formerly the three-quarter-pulse tone was 
 treated as a half-pulse tone continued for an additional 
 quarter pulse, and represented as such by a short 
 continuation mark extending to the comma, thus : — 
 
 Id .-,r:m 
 
 The majority of teachers however, have now de- 
 cided that the three-quarter-pulse tone should be 
 considered as a thing in itself, and not a half-pulse tone 
 continued. In addition, the above form of notation 
 was found to be inconvenient to the printer. The 
 continuation mark has now been discarded, and the 
 dot placed almost close to the comma. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 d 
 
 :r 
 
 .,r n 
 
 :r 
 
 .,n 
 
 
 % 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 f 
 
 
 .,r d 
 
 X 
 
 • 
 
 t. 
 
 
4S 
 
 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 The division of the pulse into thirds is lepresented 
 by inverted commas. 
 
 Example :- 
 
 :rtr<r|m :r<r<r|d :ti .ti |d :— 
 
 Vi lA I 
 
 3 73 73 
 
 II 
 
 Any part of a pulse may be silent. The space left 
 empty will denote the part of the pulse which is 
 silent. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 Id : .r |m : .r,m|f . ,s:m, . ,r|d :— I 
 
 \ Vz >i I X XX I 
 
 A complete time-chart for reference is given on 
 page 8. 
 
 TIME-NAMES. 
 
 The above written analysis of time-values cannot 
 convey any correct impression of their effect when 
 sung. This can only be learnt through hearing. Every 
 teacher who has experienced the difficulties of teach- 
 ing Rhythm^ must realise the advantages of a system 
 of " Time-names," which at once gives a clear con- 
 ception of the mental effect of various rhythmic forms, 
 and fixes their conception on the ears and minds of 
 the pupils. The time-names of the Tonic Sol-fa 
 system have been adopted from M. Paris's " Langue 
 des durees," which had previously been successfully 
 used in France in connection with the " Galin-Paris- 
 Cheve" system. This system is in many respects 
 identical with the Tonic Sol-fa system and is based 
 

 TIME. 49 
 
 on the same fundamental principles. The Time-names 
 have been adopted by the promoters of other systems, 
 6ut have been so improved (?) as to be almost un- 
 recognisable. The beautiful simplicity of the arrange- 
 ment of the vowels has been discarded, and a separate 
 vowel introduced on every accent. The mere effort 
 of memorizing such a complex arrangement of names 
 induces confusion and neglect of the thing. When 
 the founder of the Tonic Sol -fa system, — Rev. John 
 Curwen, — first adopted the French time-names he 
 was induced to improve (?) on them by changing the 
 consonants, and in several instances the vowels also ; 
 but his experience, and that of the large body of 
 teachers of the system, resulted in a return being 
 made to the simple names, as proved and tested by 
 the French for years. In announcing his decision he 
 says, "If names become complex they draw a large 
 amount of attention to themselves, which should be 
 given to the things they represent. In carrying the 
 time-names through a course of lessons, I found that 
 my modifications, simple as they seemed, had intro- 
 duced a practical complexity which became more 
 troublesome than useful, and that increasingly so as 
 we went further on. Therefore it was after long 
 discussions and experiments that we decided to use 
 the French time-names just as they came to us after 
 years of well-tested use." The Time-names have now 
 been in use for sixty years, and, in their original form, 
 are more generally used than ever. 
 
 " The system is founded on the principle that time 
 is measured to the ear and mind, not by appreciated 
 
50 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 durations only, but by those louder and abrupt deliv- 
 eries of tone which we call accents — both by the 
 stronger accents of a measure and by the more deli- 
 cate accents of a pulse." The time-name for W\g first 
 stroke of a pulse is Taa^ and, should no qualifying sign 
 be added within the pulse, •'o additional syllable is 
 necessary. Consonants indicate the percussion of 
 tones, vowels indicate their duration. The following 
 are the time-names for the common divisions of 
 rhythm : — 
 
 WHOLE-PULSE TONES. 
 
 d 
 
 Taa 
 
 :r 
 
 Taa 
 
 n 
 
 Taa 
 HALVES. 
 
 
 :d 
 
 Taa 
 
 
 Taa - Tai 
 
 Taa - 
 
 .d r 
 
 Tai Taa . 
 QUARTERS. 
 
 Tai 
 
 :d 
 
 Taa . 
 
 .d 
 
 Tai 
 
 V '■ 
 
 HALVES AND QUARTERS. 
 
 THIRDS. 
 
 |d,r .m,f :s ,f .m,r Id .t, :d 11 
 
 |Ta fa te fe Ta fa te fe Taa Tai Taa || 
 
 W .r ,n :f .n,r |m ,f .s :d M 
 
 |Taa te fe Taa te fe ta fa Tai Taa || 
 
 THREE-QUARTER AND QUARTER. 
 
 [I .,r im .,f Is .,f :m 
 
 Taa . fe Taa - fe Taa - fe Taa 
 
 li t; 
 
 l'-. 
 
 Id ,r ,n rr ,m ,f |m ,f ,s :d || 
 
 |Taa tai tee Taa tai tee Taa tai tee Taa || 
 
TIME. ' . %i 
 
 The Time-names for silences are formed by sub- 
 stituting s for the initial consonant, thus — 
 
 d (n . :d . 
 
 Taa • Saa ' Taa Sat Taa Sai 
 
 I 
 
 .d :r . ,m |f ,n . ,r :d 
 
 'aa Tai Taa se fe Ta fa se fe Taa Sai 
 
 The time- names for continued tones arc formed by 
 simply omitting the initial consonant, thus : — 
 
 
 d :- |r 
 
 AA -aa Taa 
 
 d :- ,r .n ,f |s 
 
 "^AA -a fe te fe Taa 
 
 -aa 
 
 .d 
 
 Tai 
 
 -aa 
 
 .f ,n 
 
 te fe 
 
 •aa 
 
 -ai tt-e 
 
 d :— ^r <m |f 
 
 aa -aa tai tee Taa 
 
 Note. — '* Ai " is pronounced as in mat'd, fail, etc. : " aa ' as in 
 father; "a" as in mad; " e " as in l«d, and " ee " as in tr£<r. 
 
 For time-names of more intricate divisions of the 
 pulse, see Time-Chart on page 8. 
 
 In practice, the time-names are sung on a monotone. 
 It must be borne in mind that they are simply a 
 means to an end, and not, as has sometimes been 
 claimed, the " Ne plus ultra " in teaching time. We 
 have frequently met with classes which could sing the 
 most complicated rhythms while using the time-names 
 or laa on one tone, but stumbled wofully when at- 
 tempting to sing in tune simple exercises, containing 
 no greater difficulties of rhythm than half-pulses. Such 
 results are invariably caused by a false interpretation 
 of the principle of teaching " one thing at a time." 
 The elements of Time and Tune should invariably be 
 
5a THE TEACHER'S HANDBOOK. 
 
 taught separately until each has been mastered, but 
 should then be immediately combined. When a 
 
 certain division of rhythm has been mastered, and 
 
 can be readily sung at sight on one tone, it should 
 
 be combined with various tune-forms and practised 
 
 thoroughly. Until this has been accomplished, it is 
 
 unwise to introduce any new or more difficult form ot 
 
 rhythm. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 EAB CTTLTIYATIOir. 
 
 In the foregoing chapters we have confined the 
 attention almost entirely to the reading of music ; 
 but now an equally important subject remains to be 
 discussed, viz., the thinking of music. 
 
 The importance of this factor of musical education 
 cannot be over-estimated. We have frequently met 
 with instances of persons who could read music, but 
 who could not tell the names of tones by ear, but 
 have never known anyone who could name tones by 
 ear without being able to sing them readily at sight. 
 Many teachers have the impression that the faculty 
 of recognizing tones by ear is difficult of acquirement, 
 and can only be acquired by the gifted few. The 
 unv»arying experience of practical teachers is that an\' 
 l)upil who can recognize the difference between a 
 high tone and a Ic iV one, can be trained to distinguish 
 minute intervals of tune and time, provided the 
 course of training be systematic and thorough. 
 
EAR cri/nvArioN. 53 
 
 The Tonic Sol-fa system of ear-training is based 
 on the doctrine of " mental effects " of tones in key» 
 not on the effects of tones in absolute pitch. One of 
 the ablest of American musical critics, in an article 
 on the subject, says : — " The current impression of 
 the average American writer on this subject, that the 
 main feature of the Tonic Sol-fa system is the simple 
 
 notation, leaves entirely out of the 
 question two other elements, which 
 
 A CRITIC'S Opinion 
 OF Sol-fa Methods. 
 
 are, if possible, even more important. The first of 
 these elements is the method of instruction, or of 
 cultivating the ear, invented, systemized and perfected 
 by the Tonic Sol-fa teachers. They have the only 
 system of training the ear to a cognition of musical 
 impressions, according to their real nature, possessed 
 by any body of elementary teachers." 
 
 Exercises in "ear-telling" should form a part of 
 every music-lesson. These exercises cultivate quick- 
 ness in the sense of hearing, and in perception of 
 tone relation ; and, in addition, cultivate the powers 
 of observation and analysis. Pupils who have been 
 trained on this principle can usually see more in a 
 
 musical composition than those whose 
 powers of reading only, have been 
 
 Cultivate Intelu- 
 qe:«t Observation. 
 
 cultivated. The latter are usually found lacking in 
 the analytic faculty in observing. Just as in viewing 
 a laritiscape, a cultivated eye will see beauties which to 
 the ordinary observer are invisible, so also in reading 
 music. Pupils should be trained, rot to be mere 
 singing machines, but to be observant listeners and 
 intelligent performers. ^ ' . 
 
54 I'HE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 These exercises are also valuable 
 from the fact that they give certainty 
 
 Ear Exercises 
 Assist the Voice. 
 
 to the voice in reading music. Many teachers make 
 the fatal mistake of teaching singing by the same 
 methods as they teach playing on an instrument. In 
 playing, the reading of the notes is simply a matter 
 of location^ i. e.y reading the positions of the notes 
 upon the staff and locating them upon the keyboard 
 of the instrument. This may be accomplished me- 
 chanically by persons utterly devoid of musical feel- 
 ings ; but the reading of music in singing is a very 
 different matter. No person can produce a vocal 
 tone without first having formed a definite conception 
 of the tone to be produced. In training the mind to 
 form this conception, ear exercises are of the utmost 
 importance. 
 
 They are also helpful in testing individual pupils 
 in musical examinations. Written examinations in 
 music are frequently valueless as an indication of 
 musical ability, while individual examinations of a 
 practical nature are as frequently misleading. In the 
 
 state of nervousness consequent on 
 the consciousness of being under 
 
 Useful as an 
 Examination Test. 
 
 examination, pupils cannot be expected to do justice 
 to themselves or their teacher, as they frequently lose 
 control of the voice altogether. The ear exercises 
 supply a practical test which is a happy medium 
 between written and oral examinations, combining 
 the advantages of both, while being freed from their 
 disadvantages. ■ 
 
 While the advantage of these exercises cannot be 
 
 , I 
 
 I 
 
EAR CULTIVATION. 55 
 
 gainsaid, it is a matter of regret that, of all subjects 
 in the musical curriculum, this receives the least 
 attention. The reason is not far to seek. The ma- 
 jority of teachers consider the subject too difficult, 
 and are afraid of making mistakes while conducting 
 the exercises. Teachers of ordinary musical ability 
 can easily overcome this difficulty by attending to 
 the preparation of the lesson. This may be done by 
 memorizing a few phrases, suited to the grade to be 
 taught, and using them as ear-tests. Three or four 
 such tests will be sufficient for a first attempt. When 
 these have been used successfully, confidence will 
 result, and exercises containing greater difficulties 
 may gradually be introduced. 
 
 Unfortunately, however, there are 
 many otherwise excellent teachers 
 
 All Teachers Can 
 
 Learn to 
 
 Teach MU8I0. 
 
 who have been denied the advantages of an early 
 musical education, and consequently cannot, with any 
 degree of confidence, use their voices in teaching to 
 sing. Many will unhesitatingly condemn such teach- 
 ers for attempting to teach music, saying they ought 
 not to be allowed to do so ; but to this I most em- 
 phatically take exception. In this enlightened age 
 they are few persons who will deny the utility of 
 music-teaching in the school-room, or its advantages 
 as a means of educational recreation. Granted that 
 it possesses the advantages which have been claimed 
 in its behalf, are teachers to be deprived of the enjoy- 
 ment of sweet sounds, solely on account of an inability 
 which is no fault of theirs ? Most certainly not I 
 have had the privilege of being associated in the 
 
56 THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 work of teaching with many such teachers, and have 
 yet to learn of one who could teach other subjects 
 satisfactorily and has failed with music, after a. 
 conscientious endeavor to attain the necessary pre- 
 liminary qualifications. Such teachers may never 
 acquire sufficient confidence to enable them to sing 
 in presence of their pupils, but they undoubtedly can 
 cultivate the power of detecting errors in singing, by 
 studying under a competent teacher. For the benefit 
 of such teachers the following methods have been 
 devised. • 
 
 Cultivate the habit of vocalising in your pupils. 
 
 This will enable them to think the tones indepen- 
 dent of their names. Encourage pupils to do this 
 individually. 
 
 If pupils display special aptitude in this direction 
 let them sing an ear-test while the others write the 
 names of the tones. Example. — A girl satisfies the 
 teacher that she is competent to vocalise a phrase of 
 
 four tones. She writes them on her 
 slate, and takes a position in front of 
 
 Pupils Assist 
 THE Teaoher. 
 
 class. Pupils are directed to write on their slates the 
 numerals I, 2, 3, 4, and to listen for the fourth tone. 
 The girl will then vocalise the four tones, say d S n d'. 
 Pupils will then write the name of the fourth tone 
 under number 4. This will be repeated while they 
 listen for the third, second, and first tones, respectively, 
 when the correct names will be announced. If this 
 exercise be carefully conducted, pupils will be eager 
 to assist and will probably display more interest than 
 when the exercise is sung by a teacher. 
 
^ SCHOOL SONGS. 57 
 
 A musical instrument may also be used with 
 advantage. If a piano or organ is available, so much 
 the better; but if not, there are other less costly 
 
 instruments which will serve the pur- 
 pose equally well. There is a 
 
 Instrumental Aid 
 IN Ear-Trainino. 
 
 suitable little instrument called the " Metalophone," 
 which can be procured at a moderate cost. It is 
 composed of a sounding box made of wood, on which 
 strips of metal of various lengths are loosely nailed. 
 These, when struck with a small hammer, produce 
 distinct musical sounds which can be distinguished 
 readily by ear. In purchasing, it will be necessary to 
 select one which is strictly in tune, as the inferior 
 sorts are apt to be wofully deficient in this respect. 
 
 Detailed hints for conducting ear-exercises will be 
 found in subsequent chapters. 
 
 CHARTER IX. 
 SCHOOL soiros. 
 
 In the preceding chapters we have simply described 
 the methods of conducting exercises in the various 
 elements of music, but their successful combination 
 into a complete whole demands a special treatment 
 of its own. In teaching music there is a constant 
 
 danger of sacrificing everything to 
 technique^ to make singing automatons 
 
 Dangers of Studying 
 Exercises only. 
 
 of our pupils, rather than to lead them to see and 
 
58 THE TEACHKK's HANDBOOK. 
 
 feel the beauties of song, and so give intelligent ex- 
 pression to the sentiments of the poet and composer. 
 In order to gain this desired end, exercises, in Tune, 
 Time, Ear-training and Vocal Gymnastics, must cer- 
 tainly be studied, but simply as a means to an end. 
 As a means of developing the powers of observation 
 and concentration, of cultivating readiness in reading, 
 and agility in executing, so that the mind may be 
 relieved of all thought of merely mechanical details, 
 and be at liberty to think of the more aesthetic 
 qualities of music. If our choice were limited to 
 exercises without songs, or songs without exercises 
 we should certainly choose the latter ; but fortunately 
 the Tonic Sol-fa system provides an excellent means 
 of securing both. A properly selected song, well 
 taught, provides an excellent means of training at 
 once the voice, the ear and the mind. 
 
 In order that a song may possess those educational 
 advantages it must be adapted to the abilities of the 
 Dupils, must contain no difficulties of Tune or Time 
 
 which have not been previously mas- 
 tered by a series of carefully graded 
 
 Selection of Songs. 
 
 gymnastics. It must also contain no tones outside 
 the limits of the range of the pupils' voices, and above 
 all the sentiment of the verse must be such as the 
 pupils can easily comprehend. No true teacher would 
 for a moment, think of giving an exercise in reading 
 from the Fourth Book to the pupils of the Primary 
 class, still the equally un-educational method of 
 teaching (?) fourth-step songs to junior pupils is being 
 pursued every day. 
 
SCHOOL SONGS. 59 
 
 If songs are adapted to the abilities of the pupils, 
 their study is certain to be a delightful source of 
 pleasure and interest ; they will be found humming 
 them around the school yard, or singing them in the 
 home for the entertainment of their parents, where, 
 probably, their influence will create more true happi- 
 ness than the most brilliant warbling of the prima 
 donna. The use of songs in the school-room fulfils 
 the double purpose of providing instruction and re- 
 creation in the most pleasing form. Most teachers 
 can testify to the benefits derived from singing some 
 well-known school song when pupils have become 
 tired and restless from close application to more 
 severe studies. Such benefits will be impossible of 
 attainment, however, should the singing of the song 
 entail the study of any serious technical difficulties. 
 Let the songs selected be such as have been described 
 above, and let them be preceded by a carefully 
 graded series of exercises, and the singing lessons 
 will be remembered as being among the brightest in 
 school-life. An excellent authority on teaching has 
 observed that " Our pupils remember us, not from the 
 amount of technical knowledge with which we may 
 have been able to cram their minds, but from the 
 pleasure which we have combined with the acquire- 
 ment of that knowledge." If we desire to make 
 school-life thoroughly enjoyable, alike for pupils and 
 teachers, let us have it freely interspersed with suitable 
 songs which will teach only the true, the noble and 
 the good. . , 
 
 It must not, however, be supposed that only pupils 
 
6o THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 who have learned to read music are to be allowed to 
 sing. Such a course would be altogether contrary to 
 nature. Children learn to sing at their nriother's knee 
 by the simplest of all methods, viz, imitation^ and 
 this should be continued throughout the earlier period 
 of school-life. Our aim, as teachers, should be to 
 continue the imitative process begun in infancy, so 
 that the children may never know the time when 
 they could not sing. This can best be accomplished 
 through the free use of Rote Songs, consisting of 
 simple words of easy comprehension, enlivened by a 
 
 bright ** taking " melody. In teach- 
 ing a song by rote, the teacher must 
 
 Rote Songs. 
 
 3e careful to avoid loud or harsh singing, using only 
 a pure, sweet tone of voice. The time should first be 
 , taught without the words, the teacher alone singing 
 the first phrase while the pupils listen. When one 
 phrase has been correctly imitated, the next will be 
 taught by the same method until the whole tune has 
 been learnt. The words should be studied separately 
 from the teacher's pattern. In teaching the words, it 
 is advisable to recite them on a monotone^ but with 
 exactly the same rhythm and accent as will be used 
 when singing in tune. When this has been accom- 
 plished the words and music should be combined, 
 and the ideas contained in the words developed by 
 appropriate questioning. A number of suitable Rote 
 songs will be found in the Appendix. 
 
 Rote songs are frequently sung in 
 combination with appropriate actions, 
 
 ACTION Songs. 
 
 and are then known as Action Songs. By many 
 
SCHOOL 80N0& 6l 
 
 teachers, Action Songs have been unhesitatingly con- 
 demned, and by others they have been equally unhesi- 
 tatingly endorsed. It cannot be denied that when 
 singing is accompanied by appropriate actions., or 
 gestures, the general effect is enhanced and rendered 
 exceedingly pleasing. The actions, likewise, usually 
 consist of calisthenics, designed with the view of pro- 
 moting aesthetic pliysical culture, and development ol 
 what has been fitly tOktncd the '' poetry of motion." As 
 such, they are certainiy productive of beneficial results, 
 and are worthy of encouragement within reasonable 
 limits. The great danger attending their use lies in 
 the tendency to subordinate the mttsical to the gc^iercu 
 effect. This leads to the formation of careless habits 
 in singing, and consequent misuse of the voice. In 
 trained operatic artists, we have the highest type of 
 singers of Action Songs. Even they, though trained 
 to the scientific use of the voice, tell us that the strain 
 on the physical and nervous system is much greater 
 on the operatic stage than on the concert platform, 
 where gestures are not generally used. If this be the 
 case with adults, specially trained for this particular 
 work, and possessing the knowledge requisite to 
 govern the various faculties which it calls into action, 
 
 how great must be the danger atten- 
 dant on the singing of Action Songs 
 
 Danger of 
 action sonqs. 
 
 by little children, whose physical organs are as yet 
 weak and undeveloped. In Action Songs the gestures 
 should be quiet and natural, and the singing soft and 
 sweet The teacher who cannot secure attention to 
 these essentials, should not attempt the teaching of 
 
62 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Action Songs. Their use can be entrusted with safety 
 only to the teacher who can realise the extreme 
 delicacy of the vocal organs, and the care necessary 
 to their successful preservation and development. 
 
 If the object be the study of calisthenics, that only 
 should engage the attention of the pupils. I have 
 :icen a class of children with backc bent and hands 
 outstretched in the endeavour to touch their toes, and 
 while in this position actually attempting to sing. Of 
 course freedom of breathing under the circumstances 
 was an impossibility. I do not for a. moment object 
 to calisthenic3 -n the school-room, being aware of the 
 beneficial results following their intelligent use ; but 
 when calisthenics are being practised as such, I am 
 of che opinion that the music necessary to the defini- 
 tion of a rhythmical accompaniment should not be 
 supplied by the performers themselves. In order 
 to supply the necessary accompaniment, a musical 
 
 instrument may be used. If a piano 
 or organ should not be available, the 
 
 Calisthenios and 
 81NOINQ. 
 
 mouth organ, metalophone, or even the tap of a toy 
 drum, w:ll be found serviceable. Flailing these, one 
 half of the class may sing the accompaniment while 
 the other silently practise the exercises. By this 
 means" they can study the actions of the others and 
 learn sufficient for their performance when the others 
 have finished. 
 
 \ 
 
 . '(.■■ f^ - 1-. 
 
SYLLABUS FOR GRAD£D SCHOOLS. 63 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 SYLLABirs OF UlrsiG FOB QEADED SCHOOI& 
 
 Reference has already been made to the division 
 of the system into " Steps," and the necessity of 
 adhering to tlie plan of teaching contained therein. 
 In order to adapt the system to the ordinary divisions 
 of Public and High Schools, a more minute sub- 
 division is necessary. Some writers favour the plan 
 of teaching music in three divisions only, viz., Primary, 
 Intermediate, and Advanced, and combining several 
 classes of various grades under each division. Under 
 exceptional circumstances this may be a convenient 
 arrangement, but it has numerous disadvantages. 
 Pupils who have already mastered the elements of 
 the " step " are compelled to practice with others who 
 have not, which ic liable to induce lack of interest in 
 the one class, and mere dependence and rote-singing 
 in the other. There is also the additional disadvan- 
 tage of loss of time in combining several classes in 
 one room, and the increai^cd difficulty of securing and 
 maintaining discipline in large classes. Better results 
 can be secured wlien the exercises are adapted to the 
 ability of each class, and superintended by the regular 
 
64 THE TEACHER'S HANDBOOK. 
 
 teacher. This will necessitate the division of the 
 subject into at least eight separate grades, in accord-, 
 ance with the classification usually adopted in grading 
 the ordinary subjects of the school curriculum. While 
 the classification is practically the same in a'' Cana- 
 dian Public Schools, there exists a lack of uniformity 
 in the terminology employed to designate the various 
 classes. In order to prevent the confusion inseparable 
 from an adoption of the terminology of any particular 
 locality, we will simply provide a syllabus for ist 
 Division, 2nd Division, etc. This can be adapted to 
 any system of grading which may be desired. The 
 subject has been divided into six branches, each of 
 which should receive special attention. 
 
 Many teachers devote the time of the music lesson 
 almost exclusively to sight-singing and the practice 
 of songs, to the exclusion of ear exercises and time 
 drill. In order to avoid this error, a monthly review 
 should be held and marks given in each subject 
 according to the degree of proficiency attained. This 
 plan has been found to produce excellent results 
 wherever tried. The pupils like to know exactly how 
 they stand in all subjects, and when poor marks are 
 given in any, an improvement is always noticeable at 
 next review. 
 
 The following will be found useful as a guide in 
 preparing for reviews. The subject of voice-training 
 is placed last, and pupils must be cautioned against 
 using harsh or impure tone, as the marks for this are 
 given according to the quality of the tone shown 
 in the previous subjects 
 
If 
 
 / 
 
 SYLLABUS lOR GRADED SCHOOLS. 65 
 
 MAXIMUM. 
 
 Modulate exercises ... . - g 
 Time " .... g 
 
 Sight-singing ** 8 
 
 Ear ««.... 8 
 
 Prepared song 8 
 
 Voice-training lo 
 
 Total - • • - SO . 
 
 DIVISION I. 
 
 Modulator. — To sing from teacher's pointing, in any key, 
 exercises on the OOH and BOH chords, including the upper and 
 lower octaves of the tones d, m, 8, t, r. - '^ •♦ « "•»♦ • '— '*" 
 
 Time. — To sing from pointing on blackboard, on one tone, 
 3xercises containing full-pulse, half-pulse, and contmued tones. 
 
 To write on slates, from teacher's dictation, examples of two, 
 three, and four-pulse measure. 
 
 Sight-Singing. — To sing from blackboard, phrases of four, six, 
 or eight tones composed of the tones, d, m, •, t, r, in any easy 
 position. ■. .^- ' vr ^ 
 
 Ear Exercises. — To tell, by ear, the name of any one of above 
 tones, sung to LAA or numbers. 
 
 To imitate in correct tune and time, simple phrases of from three 
 to six tones, containing divided pulses. 
 
 Prepared Song. — To be sung to words, with neatness of articula- 
 tion, and soft, pure tone, an action-song learnt by rote. ••»'>*•>►'* 
 
 To sing to words, a simple song composed of the tones d, m, s, t, r, 
 learnt by note. 
 
 Voice-Training. — To sing all exercises and songs with softness 
 and purity of tone, the mouth being opened neatly and naturally, 
 and the tone produced well forward in the mouth. 
 
 Note. — The work prescribed for this grade has been made 
 exceedingly simple, in order that every child may be enabled to 
 accomplish it. Teachers will guard against attempting anything 
 more difficult, as it is important that, at this early stage, the 
 musical faculty, however dull, should be awakened and developed. 
 \ Pupils who sing out of tune must listen attentively for some time, 
 and will soon )x enabled to sing with the others. 
 
 ■• : ■ I 
 
66 THE teacher's handbook 
 
 . V DIVISION II. 
 
 Modulator. — To sing from teacher's pointing easy exercises 
 containing all the tones of the major diatonic scale. 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to time-names, Uia, or sol-fa syllables, 
 exercises containing full-pulse, half-pulse, pulse-and-half, and con- 
 tinued tones, and full-pulse silences, written in two, three, or four- 
 pulse measure. 
 
 Sight-Singing. — To sing from blackboard easy phrases, con« 
 taining any tones of the major scale. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — To tell by ear the name of any one tone of a 
 phrase sung to laa, or numbers, the teacher previously sol-faing the 
 tones of the DOH chord. 
 
 Prepared Song. — To contain the tones of second step of the 
 Tonic Sol-fa system, viz. : d, m, 8, t, r, learnt by note, and may 
 include divided pulses. 
 
 Attention to be given to accent, enunciation, phrasing, quality of 
 tone, and expression. 
 
 Voice-Training. — Same as for Division i. 
 
 DIVISION III. 
 
 Modulator. — To sing from teacher's pointing, in any key, 
 exercises of moderate difficulty containing leaps to all tones of the 
 major scale, with special reference to fah and lah. 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to time-names, or laa, sol-fa syl- 
 lables, exercises containing divisions of time prescribed for Division 
 II. with the addition of quarter-pulse tones and silent half-pulses. 
 
 Sight-Singing. — (a) To sing from blackboard, exercises of mod- 
 erate difficulty containing any tones of the major scale. (6) To 
 sing from hooks, any exercises containing the tones of the second 
 step, but no divided pulses. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — (a) To tell by ear the name of any one tone of 
 a phrase sung to laa or numbers, the key being frequently changed. 
 [b) To sing from teacher's dictation, simple phrases of three or four 
 tones, i e., the teacher says d m r, pupils think the phras'^, then sing 
 in. tune to syllables d m r. (c) To tell by ear, and sing to time- 
 names, a short phrase containing any divisions of time mentioned 
 above. 
 
SYLLABUS FOR GRADED SCHOOLS. 67 
 
 Prepared Song. — To sing from books any simple school song 
 learnt by note. Attention to be given to accent, enunciation, 
 phrasing, quality of tone, and expression. 
 
 Voice-Training. — Same as for Division I. and II., with addition 
 of short tuning exercises in two parts. 
 
 DIVISION IV. 
 
 Modulator. — To sing from teacher's pointing in any suitable 
 key, exercises containing difficult leaps to any tones of the major 
 scale. 
 
 To sing from teacher's pointing with two pointers, simple exer> 
 cises in two parts. 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to time-names, laa or sol-fa syllables, 
 and afterwards to sing, in correct tune, simple exercises containing 
 any divisions of time specified for Divisions I, II, III. 
 
 Sight-Singing. — To sing from blackboard, in correct time and 
 tune, easy exercises containing any tones of the scale, with con- 
 tinued tones, but no divided pulses. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — (a) To tell by ear the sol-fa names of any three 
 tones in stepwise order, sung to laa, or any other syllable, (b) To 
 sing from teacher's dictation phrases of three or four syllables con- 
 taining intervals of moderate difficulty, (c) To tell by ear, and sing 
 to time-names, a short phrase containing any divisions of time 
 mentioned above. 
 
 Prepared Song. — To sing from books, in two parts, any easy 
 school song containing the tones of the third step, and easy 
 divisions of the pulse. Attention to be given to accent, enuncia- 
 tion, phrasing, quality of tone and expression. 
 
 Voice-Training. — To practice exercises in corrett breathing and 
 tone production, with fair command of voice and attention to piano 
 ^luA forte. ' • ,:r 
 
 Note. — Where the word sing is used above, singing to sol-fa 
 syllables only is implied. 
 
 The syllabus for Divisions V. to VIII. will be found in Part II. 
 
68 Tii£ teacher's handbook. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 HOTES OK DIVISIOF I. 
 
 FIRST LESSON IN TUNE. 
 
 FIRST STEP jhe following is a condensed sketch of 
 MODULATOR. ^ ^^^^ j^^^^^ .^^ ^^^^ ^^ actually given to 
 
 a class of pupils in the Primary Grade : 
 
 in> 
 
 DOH' 
 
 Introduction of Subject, (a) 
 
 Teacher. — We are now about to have our first 
 lesson in music, but before we begin, I want you 
 to tell me just what you think music is. Is it 
 
 • something you can see ? or taste ? or hear ? 
 
 Class. — Something we can hear. 
 
 • Teacher,— Yes ; music is something we can hear 
 What do we call anything which we can hear ? 
 
 SOH C/aw.— Sound. 
 
 Teacher.— ^ovi I will drop this pointer on the 
 desk, and you will tell me what you hear. (Drops 
 it.) Was that a sound ? 
 ME Class.— Yes. 
 
 Teacher. — ^Was it music ? 
 
 • Class.— ^o. 
 
 Teacher.— TYieti, clearly, all sounds are not music. 
 ' DOH Now listen while I sing a little piece, and tell me 
 
 • what kind of sound you hear. (Sings short, familiar 
 air.) What kind of sound was that ? , 
 
 « /'«J5. — Nice sound, sweet sound, etc. 
 
 ' T«<wrA*r.~What kind of sound did yon hear when 
 §. I dropped the pointer ? 
 
 Class. — Rough sound, noisy sound. 
 
 • ■ Teacher. —Yts ; all sweet, pleasant sounds are 
 
 called music, and rough, harsh sounds are called 
 Hi noise- (ft) ■ . ' • * 
 
NOTKh ON III VISION I. 6f 
 
 iNTRODL'CTiCN OF DOH. 
 
 Teacher. — Now that we have found out that music is sweet sounds, 
 we will try and make some of those sweet sou nds. You will listen 
 while I sing one sound, ^nd then you will sing it after me. (Sings 
 ah, softly at moderately low pitch. Pupils imitate, and repeat.) 
 
 Teacher. — You will now listen while I sing two tones, and tell me 
 whether they are the same in sound. (Sings same a/t twice.) Did 
 you notice any difference between those two tcnes ? 
 
 Class. — No, they are the same. 
 
 Teacher. — Now try once more. 
 
 Introduction of SOH. (<) 
 
 (Sings to syllable ah, two tones doh and sob, i.e., the first ah given, 
 and another a fifth higher.) Did you notice any difference between 
 those two ? 
 
 Class. — Yes ; one was higher than the other. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite right. I will now give you the names of those 
 tones. The low one we call doh, the high one mIl Now sing after 
 me (sings d ■ and pupils imitate several times). I will now write 
 
 them on the blackboard | Writes ^^ I and you will sing them 
 
 as I point. (Points to notes in any order while pupils sing asi 
 directed.) 
 
 Introduction of ME. 
 
 Now you will listen while I sing to ah and tell me which of those 
 tones I sing last, (Sings d « d to ah, then s d s, pupils nan.ing 
 last tone sung.) You seem to know those two very well. Try once 
 more. (Sings d i m to ah.) (d) Now tell me which tone I sang last. 
 
 Class. — Doh, aoh, new tone, various answers. 
 
 Teacher. — You do not seem to be quite sure this time ; try again. 
 (Repeats until pupils have all discovered that the last is a new tone.) 
 
 Teacher. — Can you tell me whether the new tone is above or below 
 doh 1 above or below loh 1 
 
 Class. — Between the two. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite correct. I will now write it for you and you will 
 
 sing from my pointing. 
 
 Writes m 
 i 
 tate and attempt to sing each tone as pointed. 
 
 Gives tone doh ; class imi- 
 
7© THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 Mental Effect of Tones. 
 
 Teacher, — You seem to find it rather hard to sing them in any 
 oruer, but I think when we learn something more about them you 
 will find it much easier to sing them. Can you tell me if there are 
 any little boys in this room so much alike that you can't tell one 
 from another ? 
 
 Class. — No, they are all dififerent. 
 
 Teacher. — Just so. When you look at a boy, you see at a glance 
 what sort of a look he has on his face ; some boys have a nice, bright 
 look, others a quiet, calm look, and others a firm, determined kind 
 of look. It is just the same with those tones we have been singing, 
 each has a character dififerent from the others. You will now sing 
 as I point, and think more particularly of doh while you sing, and 
 tryito tell me what kind of tone it is. (Points while class sing, giv- 
 ing prominence to doh.) Now can you tell me what kind of tone 
 doh is ? (Class will not answer correctly at once, but as a rule their 
 answers will give some idea of the real character of the tone.) 
 
 Teacher. — I will now ask you to compare this tone with something 
 you have already seen. Most of you have seen a mountain, a strong, 
 firm, solid mountain. You have also seen a fountain, with its bright, 
 sparkling, dashing waters. Now sing those tones once more and 
 tell me which of the two doh is like. (Class sing from pointing as 
 before.) 
 
 Teacher. — Raise hands, all who think doh is like a fountain. (No 
 hands are raised.) Now all who think doh is like a mountain. 
 (Nearly all hands are raised.) 
 
 Teacher. — I think you are all right ; will you tell me why doh is 
 like a mountain ? 
 
 Class. —Because it is strong and firm. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes ! doh is the firm tone. I will write its character 
 
 beside it so that you will think of it when you sing. 
 
 Writes m 
 
 » 1 
 
 {e) The teacher will now proceed to develop the mental effect 
 of me and soh by the same process, comparing me to mother singing 
 baby to sleep, and little brother singing loudly and waking baby. 
 Me is calm and gentle. Soh is bright and bold and may be com- 
 pared with a bugle in contrast with a drum. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. It 
 
 t 
 
 Practice. 
 
 The character of each tone being written on the blackboard 
 
 II calm \ 
 m gentle l practice in singing slowly from teacher's pointing 
 ijirm ) 
 
 must now be given slowly, in order that pupils may feel the mental 
 
 effect of the tones as they sing. - 
 
 (a) This is intended to awaken interest. 
 
 (b) By this definition of music, pupils commit themselves, and 
 later on when they sing loudly or coarsely, as children will, if not 
 checked, their teacher will appeal to their former definition of music, 
 and enquire whether they are now making sweet sounds. 
 
 (c) Soh, be. ng next in importance to doh, is next in order of 
 introduction. 
 
 (d) Sing the new tone very softly in order that the dullest pupil 
 may recognize its introduction. 
 
 (e) The earnest teacher will have no difficulty in inventing sug- 
 gestive illustrations of the points to be developed, but in no case 
 may the pupils be told the character of th^ tones. 
 
 Note. — In the above lesson the correct answers by pupils are 
 given, but teachers must not expect such answers at first. The 
 teacher must take what answers the pupils may give and lead them, 
 as only a teacher can, into the desired channel. 
 
 FIRST LESSON IN TIME. 
 
 The following is a condensed sketch of a first lesson 
 in time, as given to a class of pupils in the second 
 school-year. It will be useful, where the teaching of 
 music is being introduced for the first time, to classes 
 of this or senior grades ; but where music is taught as 
 a regular subject, during the first session of primary- 
 classes, the alternative lesson given below will be 
 found more suited to the pupils* requirements. 
 
 Before proceeding to give the following lesson, the 
 teacher must be prepared to sing some well-known 
 tune with divided pulses and well marked accent ' 
 
72 THE TKACHKRS HANDBOOK. 
 
 Teacher. — In our previous lesson we learned to sing in tune the 
 tones f^oh, me, soh, but in music there is some- 
 thing to be studied besides tune. Listen while 
 I sing Lind notice whether there is anything 
 
 I INTROOUOTION. 
 
 wrong with this tune, as it is sung. (Sings National Anthem with 
 time and accent altered). Did that tune sound all right ? 
 
 Class. — No. It was all out of time. 
 
 Teachnr. — Quite right. I will sing it once more while you listen. 
 (Sings in strict time.) Did it sound any better last time ? 
 
 Class. — Yes. You sang in time. 
 
 Teacher. — I may now tell you that the " something besides Tune" 
 which I referred to is Time. 
 
 I will now sing a tune which you all know, and while I do so you 
 will clap hands gently. (Sings, '• Home, Sweet Home," while 
 pupils beat time as directed.) Can you tell me what it was that 
 made you keep time together so nicely ? 
 
 Class. — It was the singing. 
 
 Teacher. -—Yes. There is something in every 
 tune which will enable us to keep time. This 
 we call ih&pulseoi the tune. I will sing another 
 
 Pulses. 
 
 tune and you will beat time as before, that is, you will find out the 
 pulses of the tune. (Sings several tunes of varying character in 
 order to develop the fact that pulses exist in all tunes.) 
 
 Teacher. — When I sang the first tune, did you 
 
 notice whether you clapped hands for every 
 
 tone that was sung ? 
 
 Regularity of 
 Pulses. 
 
 Class. — Yes, we did. (This answer, though incorrect, is almost 
 invariably given.) 
 
 Teacher. — I will sing it once more, beating time for every tone. 
 (Sings as indicated, pupils notice the incongruous and unnatural 
 method of beating.) Is that how you beat time ? 
 
 Class. — No. We beat time more smoothly. 
 iTeacktr. — Your beating seemed more natural. Can you tell me 
 whether the beats were regular or irregular ? , 
 
 Class. — They were regular. 
 
 Teacher. — You will now find] out the pulses in several ;anes, and 
 notice whether they occur as regularly as before. (Sings examples 
 of quick and slow tunes while pupils beat time.) Were the pulses 
 regular in all of these tunes ? 
 
 

 / 
 
 NOTES 0!sr DIVISION K 
 
 73 
 
 Class. — Yes, but some tunes were slower than others. 
 Teacher. — This is a very important fact. I will illustrate it for 
 you. You must all have noticed how a clock ticks and also how a 
 watch ticks. Do both tick regularly ? 
 
 Class. — Yes ; but the watch ticks the faster. 
 Teacher.— li is exactly so with the pulses in music. la some 
 tunes they move slowly, in others quickly, but in all they move 
 regularly. 
 
 There is still something to learn about pulses. 
 We have found that they are all equal in length. 
 Now we will see whether they are equal in 
 
 ACCENT OF Pulses. 
 
 strength. (Sings an example of tune in duple time.) Did you notice 
 any difference in the strength of the pulses? 
 Class. — Every alternate pulse was strong. 
 
 Teacher.— Yes. The order of the pulses was strong, weak, strong, 
 weak. You will now sing to the syllable laa after I have given you 
 a pattern. (Sings laa, laa, laa, laa, repeatedly, after which 
 pupils imitate.) All exercises in time only must be sung on one tone 
 
 in order that it may be free from difficulties of 
 tune. When pupils can sing readily with alter- 
 nate strong and weak accents proceed to the 
 
 Notation. 
 
 notation of time. 
 
 Teacher. — I will now give you the signs for the pulses. , 
 
 The pulse which has the strong accent is represented by an up- 
 right bar ( I ) and the weak accent by the colon ( ; ) 
 
 Writes 
 
 II 
 
 The double bar simply indicates the close of the exercise. 
 
 You will now sing as I point to the accent marks. (Class sing 
 as directed, care being observed in sustaining the weak pulses for 
 full length of time.) 
 
 Teacher. — You notice how nicely the strong 
 pulses seem to measure off the music into equal 
 divisions. The space from one strong accent 
 
 Measure. 
 
 to the next strong accent we call a measure. Count the pulses and 
 tell me how many we have in each measure. 
 . Class. — We have two pulses in each measure. 
 Teacher. — This we call two-pulse measure. 
 
74 
 
 THE lEACHER'S HANDBOOK. 
 
 In order to develop the accent, the above will now be contrasted 
 with three-pulse measure in which the accents occur as strong 
 weak, weak. T- 
 
 Written 
 
 Praotioe. 
 
 Now write four two-pulse measures, with one 
 note in each pulse. 
 
 m :r Id :ti Id :d 
 
 :r 
 
 , Each note is sung loudly or softly according to the accent- 
 mark which immediately precedes it. 
 
 Teacher. — We have a series of time-names 
 which you will find helpful in keeping correct 
 time. When we have one note in each pulse 
 
 Time-Names. 
 
 we call it taa. (Writes taa under each note, gives pattern, and 
 
 pupils imitate.) 
 
 Teacher. —lAsien while I sing and tell me whether you notice any 
 
 change. (Sings in one tone, prolonging the first tone in second and 
 
 last measures.) 
 
 Class. — You made some tones too long. 
 Teacher. — In which measure did I do so ? 
 Class. — In the second and fourth measures. 
 
 Two-Pulse Tones. 
 
 Teacher.— I will give you the time-names for the prolonged tones 
 and you will imitate. (Sings taa taa taa-aa taa taa taa-aa, and 
 class imitate.) 
 
 Teacher. — The sign for a continued tone is the dash ( — ). (Rubs 
 out fourth and.last notes and substitutes the dash.) 
 
 Pupils -will now be drilled in singing from teacher's pointing, 
 using time-names and laa. 
 
 ALTERNATIVE FIRST LESSON IN TIME. 
 
 (for infant classes only.) ,^ 
 
 Teacher. — I am now going to sing a song which you all know, and 
 vfhile I sing you will clap hands softly. 
 
 (Sings bright kindergarten song in duple measure while pupils 
 beat time.) 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION 1. 75 
 
 Teacher. — You will now sing the sonR yourselves and clap hands 
 as you did before. 
 
 (Pupils sing as desired, while the teacher draws an upright line 
 as the accented notes are sung.) 
 
 I i I I f 
 
 Teacher. — While you were singing I drew some lines on the 
 board, and now I will tell you what we will do with them, we will 
 make bouses with them. Just count them, please, and tell me how 
 many houses we have. 
 
 (Class count as teacher points, one, two, three, four.) 
 
 Teacher. — Yes ; we have four houses with a big double wall at 
 the end. Can you tell me how many rooms we have in each house ? 
 
 Class. — One room in each house. 
 
 Teacher. — I am sure none of you little folks would care to live in 
 a house with only one room. Can any one tell me how we can 
 make these into two-roomed houses ? 
 
 Class. — Build a wall in the middle. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes ; that would do nicely. (Writes a short thick line 
 in each house.) 
 
 : I ' I I I ' I < II 
 
 Now we have two rooms in each house. I think that in every 
 house we should have a play-room for little boys and girls, don't 
 you think so too ? 
 
 Class. — (Smiling,) yes ! 
 
 Teacher. — We all know that when little folks are playing, they do 
 not like to be kept too quiet, but enjoy making a noise and having 
 a nice time, so we will have one of these rooms for a play -room, 
 a noisy room. Suppose we decide on the one after the big, high 
 wall for our noisy room. (Points to the first pulse in each measure, 
 while pupils say noisy room.) 
 
 Teacher. — I want some one to point out all the noisy rooms. 
 Who will do it ? 
 
 (Ail are eager to point, teacher selects several who do it correctly 
 vV: inturn.) " . ; . ; 
 
f , 
 
 ft thf: ikaohbr's handbook. 
 
 Teacher. — Now listen tvhile I sing, making all the :ooiU^ .Dw 
 noisy rooms. Does that sound nicely ? 
 
 C/<I55. — No. 
 
 Teacher. — Listen again and tell me whether you thiuk this souhci:* 
 better. (Sings with alternate strong and weak accents). 
 
 Class. — That sounds better ; we like it better. 
 
 Teacher. — What difference did I make ? 
 
 Class. — You made noisy rooms and quiet ones. 
 
 Teacher. — We will take the rooms behind the little wall for our 
 quiet ones. Please name them as I count. 
 
 (Pupils name as requested.) 
 
 Teacher. — Who will point out all the quiet rooms ? 
 
 (Pupils point out all the quiet or noisy rooms as desired.) 
 
 Teacher. — There is just one thing about our houses that I don't 
 like. When we point from a noisy to a quiet room, we have to skip 
 over the little wall. How can we improve that ? 
 
 C/ass.— Make a door through it. 
 
 Teacher.— Yes, that will do nicely. 
 
 Erase part of each short line, leaving the xcquired sign for the 
 weak accent, thus : — 
 
 Teacher. — Now, sing while I point to each of the rooms. (Sings 
 pattern on one tone which pupils imitate). 
 We will now place one little boy in each of the rooms. 
 
 Writes, 
 
 Id :n Is :8 Is :n Id :d 11 
 
 When we have a boy in the noisy room, what sort of boy will 
 
 he be? . . .. , 
 
 Class. — A noisy boy. 
 
 Teacher. — Show me all the noisy boys. All the quiet boys ? ' 
 (Pupils point as desired.) 
 
 Teacher. — When we have just one boy in a room we call him taa. 
 (Sings TAA taa taa taa). 
 (Pupils imitate.) . > • 
 
 Teacher. — Now sing the syllables on one tone. 
 
 Time-Names. 
 
Continued Tones. 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION I. 77 
 
 (Class sing as desired.) Listen while I sing it 
 and tell me whether I make any change. (Sings 
 on one tone, continuing the first 1 in second 
 measure, and first d in fourth measure.) 
 
 Class. — You missed some of the boys. You made some longer 
 than others. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite right. This loh (indicates it) went right into the 
 next room and doh did the same. We will put away the two which 
 I did not sing. (Erases second ■ and last d). When we want a 
 little boy to get through from a noisy room to a quiet room we 
 will lay down a little carpet for him to walk on. (Writes continua- 
 tion mark in empty pulses.) 
 
 Listen while I sing this and tell me what I sing in the rooms with 
 the carpet. (Sings to time-names.) 
 
 Class. — You sang aa. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite right. You will now sing it as I did. (Class 
 sing as desired.) 
 
 The exercise will now be sol-faed on one tone, then in tune from 
 teacher's pattern. 
 
 By the above method, the pupils are led from point 
 to point, as in an interesting story, and unconsciously 
 learn the first elements of time, without being bur- 
 dened with their nomenclature. The lesson is given 
 in detail, all the above ans>yers having actually been 
 given by pupils of the infant class. The play-names 
 used may be retained for some time, until the pupils 
 can read from notes, then, as a reward for diligence, 
 they may be told the real names, pulse, measure, etc. 
 
 The first introduction of a subject only occurs at 
 intervals, and daily drill must succeed every such 
 introduction. As the time available for teaching 
 music is necessarily short, it will be our endeavor to 
 assist the teacher to make the best possible use of it, 
 by giving examples of methods of drilling in all the 
 various topics. 
 
 .A- 
 
/ 
 
 78 THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 MODULATOR DRILL. ' 
 
 Use a first step modulator, which is composed of 
 
 the tones d m s only. If a printed step modulator 
 
 has not already been procured, an excellent substitute 
 
 can be made by writing the names of the tones in 
 
 colors on the blackboard. If blackboard space is 
 
 scarce, a movable modulator can be made of black 
 
 Bristol-board, with letters cut from colored surface 
 
 paper, and pasted on. The colors recommended are, 
 
 doh — red ; me — blue ; and soh — bright yellow. 
 
 In first step exercises doh is always sung without 
 
 difficulty, soh and me require special drill. The 
 
 following illustrates the method : — . . 
 
 Drill on SOH. 
 Teacher sounds doh about pitch of D. (Pupils imitate softly.) 
 Question on the mental effect of soh. Give hand-sign for loh. 
 Teacher sings dmd; smd; mmd; dmm; mdm. After sing- 
 ing each group of three tones, give hand-sign for soh. indicating 
 that pupils will sing soh. In this exercise they confine their atten- 
 tion to the tone being studied, and become familiar with its 
 mental effect. Now point phrases in which loh predominates. 
 
 Example: — 
 
 dsmssdsdsnsdsnds. 
 
 Question on mental effect of me as above. 
 Sing dam; mds; smd; dmi; dds; sid; 
 Pupils sing me from hand-sign after each group 
 
 Drill On Me. 
 
 of three. % 
 
 Now point phrases in which me predominates. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 dmmdBmsdmmsmndBmd. 
 
 Change key frequently, and vary the order in which the tones are 
 approached. When mistakes are made, do not tell pupils to sing 
 higher or lower, but question on mental effect, as, " Was that bright 
 enough for soh 1 " " Did you sing that gently enough for me 1 " If 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION 1. 79 
 
 this fails, the tone may be sung by the teacher, but not unless 
 absolutely necessary. 
 NoTB. — See " Modulator, Drill " page 25. 
 
 SIGHT-SINGING. 
 ExAMrLBS OF Method. 
 
 Teacher writes on board dmdtmdid. Sings doh, key D. 
 Pupils imitate. 
 
 Teacher. — Now sing from my pointing. 
 
 Class sing d m correctly, but sing second d like soh. 
 
 Teacher erases first and second doh's and rewrites with bright red 
 crayon. Can you tell me what color this first doh is written with ? 
 
 Class (eagerly) — Red. 
 
 Teacher.— \nd is the second doh of the same color ? 
 
 Class. — Yes. 
 
 Teacher. — If the color of both doh's is the same, do you not think 
 that the sound of both should be the same ? 
 
 Class. — Yes ; they should have the same sound. 
 
 Teacher. — Now try again, and be careful to give the second doh 
 the same sound as the first. 
 
 Class sing correctly until second ■ is reached. 
 
 Teacher writes both soh's with bright yellow crayon and reasons 
 as before. Also dfaws attention to bright character of soh. 
 
 When the exercise has been correctly sung by the entire class, 
 the boys and girls may be asked to sing separately, next by one 
 row at a time, and finally by individual pupils. 
 
 When the exercise has been correctly sol-faed, it should be sung 
 
 to laa. 
 
 Key Exercises. — Keys C to G. 
 
 dssmsdmmd 
 m d s m d 
 B 8 n B d 
 d n d 8 m 
 
 d d m d B 
 
 In teaching sight-singing, Tune and Time may 
 occasionally be combined in such a manner that only 
 one topic will demand attention. 
 
 d 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 B 
 
 m 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 d 
 
 B 
 
 m 
 
8o 
 
 THE ftACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 Teacher |^ >jv\ 
 writes 
 
 8 :m Id 
 
 II 
 
 Class sing to time-names, then to syllables in tune, 
 making 8 only one pulse in length. This is a common 
 mistake with young pupils. Teacher shows that 8 
 should be continued through the fourth pulse, and 
 sung sok oh. It may be useful to write oh under the 
 continuation-mark. When th»'j has been sung cor- 
 rectly the tune should be changed, the time-form is 
 retained. 
 
 Exam 
 
 PLE :- 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 a. d 
 
 :m 
 
 8 :-r B 
 
 :n 
 
 d 
 
 
 1 
 
 b. d 
 
 :s 
 
 n :— m 
 
 :8 
 
 d 
 
 
 ■ 
 • 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 r. m 
 
 :d 
 
 8 :— 8 
 
 :d 
 
 m 
 
 
 d, s 
 
 :m 
 
 s : in 
 
 :d 
 
 n 
 
 ; — 
 
 Note.— 
 
 See •• Sight-Singing," page 79. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TIME. 
 
 
 
 
 
 The object 
 
 of time-exercises 
 
 at 
 
 this 
 
 stage 
 
 should 
 
 be— 
 
 1st. To develop an appreciation of the regularit)- 
 of pulses and accent '. in music. 
 
 2nd. To enable pupils to distinguish between tones 
 of one, two or more pulses in length. 
 
 3rd. To train the eye to read the notation of above 
 divisions of rhythm. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION L . 8l 
 
 EXAMPLES OF MH . ")D. 
 
 Pupils clap hands softly while singing taa^ taa^ taa 
 on one tone, taken at any rate indicated by teacher's 
 pointer.* When a change is made to a faster or slower 
 rate of speed, the singing must cease while the teacher 
 counts a few pulses at the rate required. 
 
 Vary the exercise by changing the measure fre- 
 quently. Pupils count ONr, two^ one, two ; or ONE, 
 twOy three, ONE, two, three, with emphasis on ONE. 
 
 When this has been sufficiently well sung, pupils may 
 be requested to sing two-pulse measure or three-pulse 
 measure, the teacher simply indicating the rate of 
 movement without giving any special sign for the 
 strong accent. 
 
 Short exercises containing few difficulties will be 
 found the most useful in training the eye and ear in 
 teaching time. 
 
 Write the following exercise on the blackboard : 
 Ex. I. Key D. 
 
 d :m Is :b Ib :in Id :— 
 
 Question on Measure, Accent, Length of Tones and 
 Time-names. 
 
 Direct pupils to sing to Time-names on one tone, 
 to sol-fa on one tone and to sol-fa in tune. When 
 this has been sung successfully, intimate that a change 
 will be made, and request pupils to watch closely 
 while this is being done. Alter the exercise into 
 
 Ex. 2. Key D. 
 
 Id :m Is ;— Ib :m Id :— 
 
83 . THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Question on alteration. Direct pupils to sing to 
 Time-names and sol-fr,, as r.bovc. Whenever the 
 exercise has been correctly su:;;, it should be altered 
 and taught as above. The Time-names may be grad- 
 ually discontinued, as the pupils prain confidence in 
 sol-faing at sight. The orcicr in which the tones are 
 first given, should be preserved throughout (repeated 
 tones excepted), in orcicr thfit no difficulties of tune 
 may interfere with th? sliidy of time. 
 
 The " unexpected " will be the chief source ^f 
 difficulty in this form of exercise. It has been said 
 that "the ear remembers and expects'* This truism 
 will serve to explain one-half <^^ the difficulties to be 
 met with in teaching mu^ic. Lot the above exercise 
 be altered into 
 
 |d :m |b :— In :— |d :— ii 
 
 and note the result. It will, almost invariably, be 
 noticed that the m in third measure will receive one 
 pulse only, and displacement of accent will conse- 
 quently ensue. The explanation of this is to be found 
 in a comparison of the first two with the last two 
 
 I measures. Every tune, however sim- 
 THE Umexpeoted. ? pjg^ divides naturally into at least two 
 
 sections, which should be combined according to a 
 definite rhythmic or melodic form. In the^frj/ section 
 of the above exercise, we have an example of the 
 rhythm taa^ taajaa^ aa^ which is followed by a change 
 of rhythm in the second section. In singing this, the 
 ear remembers the rhythm of the first section and ex- 
 pects the same in the second section, hence the surprise 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. 
 
 83 
 
 TnlaTorr^ ""'r "" "'^" ^-' - ^^ -t with 
 
 S used t oT f."'""" "' ^''^ ^^^^ ^^-"^d be 
 tree y used in order that pupils may form the habff 
 
 "l^ •'^ (8 :8 Is :m M 
 ^- Id :— 
 
 </. jd :pi 
 <?• Id :n 
 
 I' 
 
 In :~ 
 
 Is :n 
 
 Is :s jm .__ 
 
 s 
 m 
 
 s :s 
 
 / Id 
 ^. Id 
 
 s :— 
 
 :i»i 
 
 f- 
 
 in 
 
 ~ I M :s 
 
 Is ;m 
 s :m 
 
 d 
 
 Ex.2. KbvD. Secondary two-pulse meas^vrc. 
 
 I" :- |s :m jd 
 
 a. :d 
 
 ^. :d 
 <:i :d 
 d :d 
 
 / :d 
 ^- :d 
 
 m 
 
 JR 
 
 in 
 
 s 
 
 f- 
 
 IS 
 
 PI 
 
 s 
 
 h 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 '- Is 
 
 :w li 
 
 I' 
 I" 
 f- 
 
 n 
 
 f- 
 
 :n 
 :pi 
 
 ! — Im 
 
 - II 
 
 - II 
 • II 
 
 - II 
 If 
 
 - II 
 
 Ml 
 ' W 
 
 I' II 
 \' 1:.: 
 
84 THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 Ex. 3. Key C. Primary three-pulse measure. 
 
 d< 
 
 a. Id :d :d In 
 d :— :d I n 
 
 ^. 
 
 c. 
 
 n :m Is :8 :s I 
 :8ld' 
 
 / 
 
 d :d :d I m 
 d :d :d In 
 d :— :— |m 
 
 d :— :d I n 
 d :d :— |m 
 
 :n 8 : 
 
 — :— -|8 :8 ;8 Id' 
 
 — :m |b :— :8 Id' 
 m :Pil8 :— :— jd' 
 m :— 18 :8 :--|d' 
 
 — :ni|8 :8 :— Id' 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 The last example may be written in secondary three-pulse raea- 
 Kure by beginning on the last pulse of the measure and deducting 
 one pulse from the last note, thus : 
 
 a. :d Id :d :d In :n :m|8 :b :8 Id' :— jj 
 
 Where pupils experience a diflficulty in singing continued tones, 
 they may b© allowed to intensif/ the vowel sound in each contiAua- 
 tion. In this manner a doh which is three pulses in length will be 
 sung as doli-«h-oh, and m* as 
 
 SPECIMEN LESSONS. 
 
 Before introducing the subjects contained in the 
 following lessons, pupils should have had sufficient 
 drill in the primary lessons in tune and time to enable 
 them to read at sight exercises consisting of the three 
 tones d n 8 arranged in any order, and also any com- 
 binations of one and two-pulse tones in two-pulse 
 measure. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. S$ 
 
 Assuming that satisfactory progress has been made 
 we will now introduce the 
 
 SECOND LESSON ON TIME. 
 Write on blackboard four two-pulse measures. 
 
 I = M M M II 
 
 Teacher. — Please sing as I point. Be careful to sing the accents 
 distinctly. (Pupils sing to laa as requested.) 
 
 Teacher. — What name do we give to the space between one strong 
 pulse and the next strong pulse ? 
 
 Class. — A measure. 
 
 Teacher. — How many measures have we on the board ? 
 
 C/as«.— Four. 
 
 Teacher.— Hovr many pulses are contained in each measure? 
 
 Class.— Two. 
 
 Teacher.— ^i\\ some one please point out tiie first measure, the 
 third, etc. ? (Volunteers point out each measnre as reqaiced.) 
 
 Teacher. — Name the pulses in this measure. 
 
 Class. — Strong, weak, strong, weak, etc. 
 
 Teacher.— Now listen and tell me if I sing the poises exactly as 
 we have them here. (Sings to laa with accent on first poise of 
 every group of three, laa, laa, laa, laa, laa, laa.) How did the 
 pulses sound as I sang ? 
 
 Class. — Strong, weak, weak. 
 
 Teacher. — ^You will now sing thern. in exactly the same manner. 
 (Pupils sing from pattern, teacher tapping time lightly.) 
 
 Teacher. — I will now write from your dictation the signs for the 
 pulses as we have just sung them. What is the sign for the strong 
 pulse ? 
 
 CUus. — A bar. 
 
 Teacher. — For the weak poise ? 
 
 Class. — A colon. 
 
 Teacher.— knA what have we next ? 
 
 Class, —A weak pulse : a colon. 
 
 Writes as directed, 
 
 , : : j : : I : : I :: j| 
 
86 . THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 Ttacher.—How count and tell me how many pulses we have in 
 each measure. 
 
 Class. — Three. 
 
 Teacher.--This we will call three-pulse measure. Listen while 
 I sing, and tell me whether I sing two or three-pulse measure. 
 (Alternates two and three-pulse measure until pupils are familiar 
 with the accents in each and can detect them readily.) 
 
 Four-pulse measure will be taught by same method, the accents 
 being strong, weak, medium, weak. The sign for the medium 
 accent is a short bar, thus • 
 
 : I : 
 
 Divided Pulses. 
 Write as formerly four two-pulse measures. 
 
 d :d Id :- Id :d jd 
 
 Teachtr. — Sing this exercise to time-names. Sing it to laa. (Pupils 
 sing as requested). Now listen and tell me whether I sing it 
 correctly. (Sings it to laa, putting two tones in second pulse.) 
 Did I make any mistake ? 
 
 Class. — Yes. 
 
 Teacher. — Will some one point out the pulse in which mistake 
 was made ? How many tones did I sing in second pulse ? 
 
 Class. — Two. 
 
 Teacher. — Listen once more and tell me whether those two tones 
 are equal in length. 
 
 Class. — They are equal. 
 
 Teacher. — I will now let you hear the time-name for a pulse 
 divided into two equal parts, and you will sing it after me. (Sings 
 TAA Ta»*tai, TAA Taa-tai, and pupils imitate). Now that you can 
 sing it I will show you the sign for a pulse divided into halves. 
 (Writes two notes in second pulse with a period between and time- 
 name underneath, thus : 
 
 :d.d| 
 
 TM-tai|.) 
 
 Practise singing to time- names and laa on oue tone, and alter 
 frequently, placing half-pulse and continued tones in any order. 
 
A--'\ ,' 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION 1. 
 
 87 
 
 ExEROiiEs IN Time. 
 
 Ear Exercises in Time. 
 I will new sing a phrase and you will listen 
 
 and tell me how often you hear t&a-tai. This 
 is done at first on one tone to laa and then a 
 short tune containing divided pnlscs may be sung, if the pupils show 
 sufficient aptitude in detecting taa-tai when sung on one tone. 
 
 LESSON ON OCTAVES. 
 Teacher. — In our previous lessons we have studied three tones, 
 but there are still several others to study. Lis- 
 ten while I sing, and tell me whether you hear 
 anything that sounds like a new tone. Sings to 
 
 OOTAVE OF OOH. 
 
 laa d m I d, in the key of D or C. 
 Class. — There was no new tone. 
 
 Teacher. — Listen once more (sings d m ■ d', the last d being an 
 octave higher than the first.) 
 
 Class. — The last one was a new tone. 
 
 Teacher.— Qmie right. Now sing these four 
 tones after me. (Gives pattern and class imitate.) 
 Was the new tone higher or lower than loh ? 
 
 introouoeo by 
 Ear Exercises. 
 
 Class. — It was higher. 
 
 Teacher. — Sing the phrase again and tell me whether it sounds 
 like any of the other tones ? 
 
 Class. — It sounds like doh. 
 
 Teacher. — It really is doh, but being sung so much higher it 
 sounds like a new tone. I will now explain how we happen to have 
 one doh so much higher than the other. In the scale of music we 
 have but seven primary tones, just the same number, you will see, 
 as we have days in a week. We begin the week with Sunday, and 
 end it with Saturday. When we reach the last day of the week, 
 what day do we have next ? 
 
 Class. — We have Sunday again. 
 
 Teacher. — We do exactly the same thing with the tones 
 of the scale. (Draws diagram on blackboard). Here 
 we have the tones already learned with dots in the place 
 of those not yet introduced. Can you tell me where to 
 put the new doh ? 
 
 Class. — It should be above number seven. 
 
 Teacher.— Yes\ it is the eighth tone? (Adds d 8). The interval 
 
 m 
 
 7 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 2 
 
 X 
 
88 
 
 THE TEACHKU S HANDBOOK. 
 
 from any tone to its eighth is called an octave, and in order to 
 distinguish the upper doh we write the figure one above it, then we 
 see that it has to be sung one octave above doh. (Writes d'.) 
 
 Pupils will now be drilled in singing from 
 teacher's pointing on the modulator, exercises 
 containing the upper doh in combination with 
 
 Drill 
 
 the other tones. There will be no difficulty in teaching the mental 
 effect of the new tone, it being firm and strong as doh, but rather 
 brighter owing to difference in pitch. 
 
 The octaves of foh and me will next be intro- 
 duced, care being taken to change the key in 
 order to have the tones within the range of the 
 
 Chanoe the Key. 
 
 pupils' voices. 
 
 INTRODUCTION OF SECOND STEP. 
 
 Teacher. — How many tones have we now learnt in music ? 
 
 Class. — Three ; doh, me and soh. 
 
 Teacher. — And how many tones have we in the scale ? 
 
 Class. — Seven. 
 
 Teacher. — Now that you have studied the three named, and can 
 
 sing them readily, we will study some of the others, and then we 
 
 will be able to have even prettier tunes than we have been singing 
 
 recently. 
 
 Listen while I sing four tones, and tell me 
 
 whether you hear any new ones. While I sing, 
 
 I will point to each of my four fingers, and if 
 
 Eai Exermies. 
 
 you should hear a new tone you will be able to tell me on which 
 number it is sung. (Sings to laa, after giving key -tone, i m i d; 
 s m I m ; questioning whether new tone has been heard after singing 
 each phrase. The next phrase will have the first three tones same 
 as before, but the fourth will be ray, which is a fourth below soh.) 
 Did you hear any new tone ? 
 Class. — Yes ; the fourth one. 
 
 Teacher.— Quite right. I will repeat the phrase, and you will 
 sing it after me. (Class imitate as desired.) 
 Can you tell me where to put the new tone, 
 whether above doh or me 1 
 
 Introduction op 
 Ray. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. 89 
 
 Class. — Between doh and me. m' 
 
 Teacher. — That is its right place. The name of the new 
 tone is ray, and I will now write it on our modulator. It is d' 
 spelt r-a>y, but as we only use the initial in our notation, we 
 will write r only. (Writes r between d and m on modulator.) g 
 You will now practise this new tone from my pointing. 
 (Points to the tones in the following order, smsdsrrir m 
 m r d r.) You seem to have some^ difficulty with the new 
 tone, but I think you will find it as easy as the others when . 
 
 you have studied its character. Listen 
 while I sing, and tell me what kind of 
 a tone you think ray is. (Sings ■ m ■ r r 
 
 Mental iffeot op 
 Ray. 
 
 r 
 
 ■ r m d r, emphasizing r.) Can anyone describe its character ? 
 
 Class. — Loud ; noisy. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes, I did sing it rather louder than any of the others, 
 but any tone can be sung loudly equally well. Let me try and 
 help you with a little illustration, One day last summer, while 
 passing a nice lawn, I saw two boys.* One was running around 
 playing with his ball, but the other was lying asleep. The boy who 
 was playing did not seem to care about playing alone, so he went 
 up to the other and tried to rouse him up, but the other boy was 
 too lazy, and just rubbed his eyes a little and said, " Just leave me 
 alone, will you, I want to sleep." Here we have two boys, one 
 dull and lazy, the other lively and rousing. Which of the two do 
 you think ray is most like ? 
 
 Class. — The rousing boy. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes, ray is a rousing tone, and if you think of it as 
 such you will find little difficulty in singing it when required. 
 (Writes the word rousing opposite r, and drills on the modulator, 
 giving prominence to the new tone.) The next tone to be introduced 
 is te, which is immediately below doh. Adopt same method as in 
 introducing ray, being careful to approach it from soh. The mental 
 effect of te is sharp and piercing, and may be illustrated by a steam 
 whistle, a pen, or a scream. 
 
 The tones s t r will now be practised in the same manner as d m ■, 
 to which they are closely allied, the intervals being exactly similar. 
 (See Chordal Treatment, page 16.) 
 
THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 MODULATOR DRILL. 
 
 The intervals d' Pi and B| ri are the most difficult 
 in the first step, consequently should receive special 
 attention. In a modulator voluntary intended to 
 teach these intervals the mental effect of m should 
 be clearly established, and the tone itself repeatedly 
 sung, in order that it may be clearly fixed on the ear 
 and mind before being approached from d' or B| 
 The effect may be intensified by a pause being made 
 on PI wherever it occurs in the exercise. 
 
 Examples of Exercises: — 
 
 Key D. 
 
 dmdsnmsnsd'PiPid'PiBd 
 
 Kby g. 
 
 dmdsidmmsimBPiBdBimmd 
 
 It will be advisable to frequently contrast the effect 
 of m with 8, as b is the tone most frequently sung in 
 I place of PI. Care must be observed 
 i to keep the exercises within the com- 
 
 pass of the young voices. The extreme upper note 
 which may be taken is E', but until pupils have 
 acquired the habit of using the upper thin register 
 (see page 23) the limit may be placed at E'fe or D'. 
 The lowest which can be taken easily by an average 
 class will be about C. From this it will be seen that 
 the most suitable keys in which to practise exercises 
 containing upper d' are C, D and Elj, and for B| keys 
 E, F and G. The key should be changed frequently 
 and B| and d' should not be included in the same key. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. ft 
 
 Difficult Phrases. 
 
 The more difficult intervals should be 
 noted, and one or more introduced 
 into each lesson and practised thoroughly. The 
 following are among the most difficult phrases to be 
 found in the first step : — d' s d ; d' n B ; d i*i d' ; 
 m d' d ; 8| m s ; 8| m d ; m si d ; Bi s d. 
 
 The introduction of the SOH chord 
 will permit of much greater melodic 
 
 The Seoono Step. 
 
 variety than is possible when the tones of the DOH 
 chord alone are available. When the tones are 
 judiciously combined, many beautiful and pleasing 
 melodies can be formed, which will serve to create 
 a renewed interest in the study of the music lesson. 
 Necessarily, new difficulties will also be introduced, 
 but these need not cause any feeling of apprehension, 
 provided the First Step has been thoroughly taught. 
 At each lesson, one of the new tones at least should 
 receive special treatment, in order to establish its 
 mental effect irrespective of the interval by which it 
 may be approached. The following will illustrate 
 the method of "driving home" or "rubbing in," as it 
 is sometimes termed : — Teacher questions regarding 
 
 the mental effect of ray, sings s r*i 8 r, 
 gives manual sign for ray and directs 
 
 "Rubbinqin"Ray. 
 
 pupils to sing ray only whenever the manual sign is 
 given. The teacher will then sing the following, or 
 similar phrases, giving the sign for pupils to sing ray 
 after each phrase : — s mdr; rsrn; dnrs; 
 sd'sm; d'td's; nrdtt; rnds; 
 
 a t t B ; r d t| d. By this method pupils will 
 
92 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 t 
 
 become familiar with ray approached from any of 
 the tones already studied. 
 
 The next process will be to imitate phrases similar 
 to the above, singing ray from the manual sign after 
 each phrase, thus : — Teacher sings r n d S, pupils 
 imitate ; teacher gives sign for ray, pupils sing ray. 
 When this has been sufficiently practised, pupils will 
 be prepared to sing exercises of moderate difficulty 
 from the modulator. At first it is advisable to return 
 to the new tone frequently, pausing slightly or repeat- 
 ing the tone to allow its effect to be clearly felt . 
 
 Example: — v , . '■' 
 
 KeysC, D. 
 
 dm d s Ir — m d Ir — 8 m Id — r — In s r r 
 
 drrtilrrsn Ir— — — |m d r — lsnr — 
 
 |sd'td'|Brr — |dmr — Ir ndtildrtidlrrd- 
 The same method applies to the teaching of te, 
 the manual signs, etc., being first given, then modula- 
 tor exercises w' -i te predominating. It will be 
 noticed that the Longing of to will unconsciously lead 
 to the anticipation of the doh above. This leading 
 tendency is found in other tones of the scale, but is 
 
 most strongly felt in te. From this 
 peculiar characteristic te has been 
 
 Leamno Tone. 
 
 termed the " leading tone " of the scale. The ear can- 
 not be satisfied with a tune or phrase which ends on 
 te. In order to satisfy the ear, and secure a feeling 
 of completeness at the close of a phrase, te should 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION L ^• : ' ■■-/-^^ 
 
 invariably be followed by the doh immediately above. 
 This leading tendency must not, however, be too 
 freely indulged in throughout the exercises, as the 
 thing to be taught is not ^ow to sing t d', but how 
 to prevent its being sung when another interval is 
 required. The best means of accomplishing this will 
 be found in dwelling on the SOH chord. This makes 
 the singing of s t r' as simple as d ni s, the intervals 
 being exactly similar. 
 
 Example : — 
 
 Key C. 
 
 dm d sis s r r Istr' t Itr' s — 
 
 t t s t Id' t d' r' It r' r» d' |t— d' 
 
 d' 8 m s Is r ti r |t| d r ti Id n r 
 rst s|srtir|dmrt||d 
 
 The following are a few of the more difficult phrases 
 to be found in the second step, for subsequent practice : 
 
 V B n r, m s t, t m, t| m, m t, s t|, d' r, 
 n r d', r t, t r, d t d'. 
 
 * SIGHT-SINGING. 
 
 First Step. 
 
 In teaching Sight-Singing the same 
 difficulties have to be met as in Mod- 
 ulator Drill. At each lesson, one or more of the 
 difficult intervals of the step should be introduced 
 and practised thoroughly. The following exercises 
 must be preceded by the exercises on d m S and the 
 , lesson on Octaves : — 
 
/ 
 
 94 THE teacher's HANDBOOK; - ' ?' 
 
 Kkys C, D, e|?. Range d to d'. 
 
 dsnsd'd'snac[8!*>d 
 nmdsrndi'nsdd^smd 
 dmdsmd^dris/nssd 
 sd'swd'sindsd'sm 
 d' s m w d' A s s d' 8 PS s d' 
 ; ^ PI d 8 s*i d' lO d s d' m 3 8 d' 
 
 Ke'«s EI? , E, V, Ct. Kange s, to 8. . >^ ^ 
 
 % > ^ dMd8|ds|dm 8m 8 8|d 
 
 4 (*i d S| S| d S| d m r 8| m m d 
 
 d m s 8| d S| d 8 PI m Si m d 
 
 ; d 8| d m 8| S| d m si P! s 8i d 
 
 The * denotes the points of difficulty. 
 Exercises containing several varieties of tune 
 now be combined under one rhythmic form. 
 Ex. I. Keys C, D, Ej?. Range d to d'. 
 
 rt Id :n Is :— Id' :s in :— 
 
 
 1." *• 
 
 may 
 
 ^. jrn :s Id 
 c. Ib :n Id 
 
 PI :s 
 
 e. Id :d> 
 
 — |Pi :d Is' :— 
 
 - Id' :8 Id' :— 
 
 d' :m Is :— || 
 PI :d' Id !— II 
 
 ■"■v. • '> 
 
V 
 
 .?;■•> ■ 
 
 ' - NOTES ON DIVISION I. 
 
 Ex.2. Keys Eb, E, F, G. Range ■, to i. 
 
 ^- :d Is, :s,.s,id :m Is is.sld 11 
 
 ^- :si jd :d.d|m :d Is :m.n|d 11 , 
 
 ^^ :w|d :d.m|s :n |s ;s.m|d 
 
 95 
 
 ^ :d|in :s,n|d :s, Id :m.s|d I 
 
 B :m.s|d II 
 
 '• :m!8 :m.d|s 
 
 :n 
 
 ,y ' 
 
 f SECOND STEP. ^ ^" *^^^ ^^^P *^^ same methods will 
 
 L J t>e adopted as in the previous step 
 
 the exercises being preceded by modulator drill on 
 the new tones te and ray. 
 KbysC, D. Range t, TO r«. 
 
 dnssstr'td'smrd 
 smrsrmdrtidsrd 
 dsmsrsdt, dsrt, d 
 "drrt, rs-srt, rd 
 
 Keys E|?, E, F, G. Range a, to ». 
 
 dt|dsidrt|dsrnsd 
 " d s s, d t, r d s t, d r n 
 
 Keys G, A, B|7. Range m, to m. 
 
 d 8, n, s, d t, d s, t, r s, t, d 
 8i d t, d r t| S| d m, m, s, S| d 
 drndsiPirdsirnrtid 
 
96 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 Keys E7 to G. Range i, to 1. 
 
 a. :d |m :r.r |d :s |d :t|.ti|d 
 
 * <^. :m Id :ti.d|r :ti Id tsi.sild 
 
 II 
 il 
 
 c. :d Is :m.r !d :r Isi :d.ti Id 
 
 d. :s In :d.r Im :d Ir :n.r Id 
 
 rroiiEs REPRESENTED I Amotig thosc who havc investigated 
 
 j BY C0L 0H8. the matter, there can be no doubt 
 
 regarding the advantage to be derived from the use 
 of colors in teaching sight- singing. The object of a 
 color-scale should be to convey, through the eye to 
 the mind, a distinct impression of the effect of the 
 tones represented. We have discussed the appropri- 
 ateness of certain colors, with a large number of artists 
 and teachers, and, as a result, have decided to adopt 
 the following scale : — . . , 
 
 t— Purple. ' •■ • i 
 
 J , V 1 — Indigo. 
 ■. ■'-' '' s— Yellow. ■ .. U^:.;^'-.-'^^'^--: 
 ; f — Greea 
 
 >l: 
 
 n — Blue. > ; 
 
 r — Orange. ' v 
 
 d—Red. 
 
 It will be noticed that the prismatic colors have 
 been selected, with a slight modification of their 
 natural order. Some writers have advocated the 
 retaining of the natural order, but we cannot reconcile 
 the calm, gentle effect of me with the brightness of yel- 
 low ; or the bright, bold effect of soh with the peaceful 
 
-1. -» I. 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION L ^f 
 
 effect of blue. In practice it is not advisable to write 
 all the tones by means of colors, but only those which 
 occasion a difficulty in singing. 
 
 ■ 
 
 Example : — ' 
 
 V d m d s d> m B d. 
 
 Suppose the above exercise written 
 with ordinary white crayon on the 
 
 I Comparison of 
 I Colors. 
 
 blackboard, and pupils have made the mistake of 
 
 singing s instead of m. Let each m be written with 
 blue crayon, and pupils led to notice the oneness of 
 color and the oneness of sound. When the second 
 m is reached the color will recall the impression of 
 the first, and almost invariably will lead to its being 
 Contrast of I correctly sung. The same result may 
 Colors. be obtained by contrasting s with M. 
 
 Let s be written with yellow, and n with blue. Con- 
 trast the colors, and show pupils that thev have 
 actually been singing the same sound for the blue 
 note as for the yellow. They will thus be put on 
 their guard, and will not be liable to sing the same 
 sound for two notes differing so widely in appearance. 
 The same methods will apply to all other tones, 
 
 " '^■' ■■■■'---='■■•-■"--■ -:'■■■■ -^ TIME. ■ ■- " .■•:,■■'■-..-•-■■■-:■■■ 
 
 When pupils have been well drilled in exercises 
 containing whole-pulse tones and continued tones, 
 and have received the first lesson in divided pulses, 
 exercises containing divided pulses should be freely 
 introduced. These will at first be taught on one tone 
 only, but should be combined with melody as soon 
 
'--:.-- - ■'- . ;- '.V, „'-..■■' :^'-'-^ A 
 
 ( 
 
 9S THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 . as practicable. The simplest form of melody is that 
 • in which the same note appears in each half of the 
 divided pulse, as : — . -v . 
 
 d .d II jm .m 
 
 In blackboard exercises it will be found advantageous 
 
 to us^; colored crayons for writing the 
 pulse-signs. One uniform color should 
 
 Color in Pulses. 
 
 be used for all pulse-signs — strong, weak and medium. 
 
 " ' This directs the eye to the signs which represent the 
 pulsations or beats which are felt in singing, and 
 materially assists in overcoming the common tendency 
 to give a full beat to each tone. The half-pulse sign 
 ( , ) may be colored, but must be of a different color 
 from the pulse-signs. The hints given on page 82 
 
 • will apply equally to the following exercises. See 
 also "Time," pages 17 and 31. 
 
 Ex. I. Keys D TO A. .1 ;.;;.• 
 
 a. Id :r.r|m :r.r|d :t|.ti|d :— 
 
 b. Id :r.r|m :r |d.d:t|.ti|d : 
 
 c. Id :r |m.m:r |d.d:t| |d : 
 ^ Id :r.r|m.n:r Id :t|.ti|d : 
 tf. |d.d:r |n.n:r |d,d:ti Id 
 
 II 
 
 '-: II 
 
 / |d.d:r.r|m.m:r.r|d :t|.ti|d :— 11 
 g. |d,d:r.r|m.m:r.r|d :t|.ti|d :— I 
 
1 
 
 .>r 
 
 * . NOTES ON DIVISION I. 
 
 Tx. 2. Same Keys as above. 
 
 a. Id :d.d:r,r[m :n :r.r Id :ti 
 
 A Id :d.d:r |m :m.m:r Id :t|.ti 
 
 ^. Id :d :r.r|m.m:n :r.r Id :t| 
 
 d. Id :d :r.r|n.n:m :r.r |d :t|.ti 
 
 ^ 
 
 e. Id :— :r.r|m :— :r.r Id : 
 
 ti.tild 
 
 t, Id 
 
 t,.t, I d 
 t, Id 
 
 ti.ti I d :— :— 
 
 Ex. 3. Same Keys as above. (With change of tones). 
 
 a. Id :d.r|m :— |m :m.r|d :- 
 
 A Id :d.r|m :n.r|d :d.ti Id :— 
 
 c. 
 
 \\ 
 
 d.r :in 
 
 d. Id :r Im.r :d 
 
 «?. Id'.tiid .r in 
 
 r.d:ti Id 
 |m.r :d.t| |d 
 
 »5 t ,, -. '. - ■, 1 *■■- 
 
 w . ■- 
 
 |r.d:ti 
 
 II: 
 11: 
 IL 
 1: 
 
 J Any of the above exercises may be converted into 
 secondary form, by commencing on the weak pulse 
 and deducting one pulse from the last note in order 
 to equalise the form, thus : — 
 
 :d Id :r.r|m :r.r|d :ti.ti|d 
 
 Ordinary six-pulse measure may 
 
 Six-Pulse Measure. 1 ,. u*. u ..u i.u j 
 
 I be taught by the same method as 
 
 three-pulse measure. At this stage quick six-pulse 
 
lOO 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 measure (see page 40) may be introduced with advan- 
 tage. Its lively rhythm will tend to brighten the 
 exercises and songs, and will add much to the pleasure 
 of the music-lesson. The Time-names for thirds of a 
 pulse will be rather confusing for the pupils of this 
 grade, and should be deferred till later. The most 
 suitable plan will be to teach the exercises as in 
 ordinary six-pulse measure, and then gradually in- 
 crease the speed and beat twice in measure Pupils 
 will readily perceive that the beats occur on the strong 
 and medium accents only. 
 Ex. 4. Same Keys as above. 
 
 d :ti :d Ir :d :r |m :r :m 
 d :ti :d |r :— :— |r :d :r In 
 
 d :ti :d.d|r :d :r.r|n :in :r.r|d 
 
 . ;■ i .. "1 ■»-' ■ .■ "I, 
 
 =-|l 
 
 Dictation. 
 
 d.d:ti :d |r.r:d :r |m.n:r :n |d 
 
 Id :d :t|.d|r :r :d.rlm :n :m.r |d :— :— 11 
 
 In addition to the above, exercises 
 in writing from dictation should fre- 
 quently be given. These will assist in training the 
 eye to read the notation of time. The primary 
 exercises should consist of writing measures only, 
 thus : — Teacher will direct pupils to write two two- 
 pulse measures, explaining the relative length of the 
 bar and colon. (See page 36.) Three and four-pulse 
 measure may then be dictated. The next process 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. 
 
 lOI 
 
 will consist of writing notes of various lengths, thus : — 
 Teacher directs pupils to write two four-pulse meai>- 
 ures, then dictates slowly :- -First pulse doh ; second 
 pulse, ray ; third, me ; fourth, ray, with Taa-tai, etc. 
 When all have finished, the slates may be examined, 
 and the more common mistakes pointed out and 
 corrected by judicious questioning. When pupils 
 succeed in writing an exercise fairly well, they should 
 be rewarded by being allowed to sing from their own 
 written copy. This is usually considered a reward 
 worthy of their best efforts. 
 
 EAR EXERCISES. 
 In conducting ear exercises, the teacher should 
 carefully avoid taking answers from the few sharp 
 jupils only, but should endeavour to make the exer- 
 cises so simple and interesting that 
 all will be able to take part The 
 
 Imitation IXEROfSES. 
 
 simplest exercises for training young pupils to listen 
 well are those in which the teacher sol-fas a short 
 phrase to which the pupils listen, and afterwards 
 imitate. These should consist only of the tones 
 which have been studied. ; ■ i ' i i' 
 
 Examples : — 
 d m d s 
 s m d Si 
 m d s m 
 
 d 8i n d 
 
 First Step. • 
 
 smsdllnBdm 
 
 II "' 
 
 Ih 
 
 d 
 d' 
 d 
 
 Bi n 
 
 m s 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 B d' s 
 
 B m 
 
 d 
 d' 
 
 B d II B d s m 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
t • 
 
 102 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 ,, f. ..•,,);•.«' Second Step. 
 
 I d m d r H r s r m II d r ti d 
 
 :mtlB r t, ||r s t, d IJ d t, r d 
 
 1 8 t B d> II d> t d' s II d' s m r II 
 I d< t B d> II m d< B t II d< m r d il 
 
 Variety of rhythm may be introduced with advan- 
 tage as it helps to make the exercises more interesting 
 and lively. , , ! 
 
 Examples: — •..-■■■■ :> '::■,' .:•:. ....<■■ >'r j.-.^ 
 ;;5 |d :d.d|m :— II |d :n.d|B :— || ^ ^^ 
 
 ; ; |s :d' |t.d':B || |m :s |r.m:d 
 
 ./ (. 4- 
 
 jn.r:d |r :— || |s.m:d |s :— || 
 :bi |d :Pi.r|d || 
 
 :si Ir :d.r|m 11 ;^ic^^ 
 
 In all the above the key must be adapted to the 
 compass of the voices. The next method is that in 
 which the attention is concentrated on one particular 
 tone surrounded by several others. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF METHOD. 
 
 Teacher. — Can you tell me what kind of tone doh is ? 
 Class, — Strong and firm. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. lOj 
 
 Teacher. — I am going to sing several tones, and I want vou to 
 listen very carefully, and tell me which one sounds like doh. 
 
 (Writes on blackboard 1,2, 3, 4, gives the key- 
 tone, then sings s m b d to laa while pointing 
 to the numerals.) Raise hands all who can tell 
 
 FiNDiNQ Doh. 
 
 me on which number I sang doh. Tommy will come up and point 
 it out. (Pupil points number two.) 
 
 Teacher. — I will sing it again, and you will listen and find out 
 whether that one is firm enough for doh. (Repeats with soft 
 emphasis on me and strong on doh.) Now, what do you think 
 of number two ? - 
 
 Class. — It was not firm enough for doh. 
 
 Teacher. —Quite right ; but where was doh ? Those who think it 
 was on number one, raise hands, on three, on four. I see you 
 all now think it was on four, that is correct. You will now try and 
 find doh again, and will write what you think is the correct number 
 on your slates. (Sings m d s m to laa, while pupils listen and 
 write.) Those who have number one will raise hands; number 
 two ; three ; four. Number two is correct. ^ 
 
 The act of writing the answers compels each pupil 
 to think for himself, and is a sure means of ascertain- 
 ing whether they are equal to the 
 exercises. With very young pupils 
 
 Writing in Ear 
 Exercises. 
 
 it is advisable to use some well-known objects in 
 place of the numerals. Four little boys may be 
 brought to the front, or an equal number of birds may 
 be drawn on the blackboard, to which the teacher 
 
 may point while singing the exercises. 
 
 The remaining tones of the step will 
 3e treated by the same method as described for doh. 
 After the above have been given it will be an easy 
 matter to concentrate the attention on one particular 
 number, and find out to which tone it is sung. 
 Example. — Write on board i, 2, 3, *4. Direct pupils 
 
 Interesting 
 Devices. 
 

 104 THE TEACHER'S HANDBOOK. 
 
 to think of four only, and tell to which tone it is sung. 
 Sing d S d m, intensifying the mental effect of the 
 fourth tone, and question as above. A number of 
 exercises may be given consecutively and the answers 
 written, and examined at the close. Young pupils will 
 be interested by having a bird drawn in place of num- 
 ber four, and will readily tell which tone the bird sings. 
 In all cases corrections should be made by question- 
 ing on the mental effect, but the answer should never 
 be told by the teacher until the pupils have found it 
 for themselves. 
 
 Wb^chisd? 
 B m s d II m d s n 11 s m d s I d s m m 11 
 
 Which is s ? 
 dmds||dsdn||dmsd|lsmmd|| 
 
 Which is PI ? 
 dsdm||dndsl|dsmd||mssd|| 
 
 Which is S| ? 
 
 d m d s,|| d s,d m II m d S|d jj s,d m d II r 
 
 Which is d'?"- 
 d m s d' |[ s n d' d II d' s m d jj s d' m s || 
 
 It is unnecessary to multiply examples here, as 
 any teacher should be able to prepare them without 
 assistance. ' 
 
■\ ' 
 
 NOTES ON DJVISION I. j^^g 
 
 Which tone is sun<r on number four ? 
 
 First Step. 
 
 jd s m djjdsd njjn s sdljd s n d'll 
 
 J n s 8 d j; d n d 8 11 m s d s, Ij s, d n d j 
 }s dm 8, jjs d8 njjp, 8d'ptljd s 8 d 11 
 
 Second Step. 
 
 I d 8 n r II M r 8 d II 8 t s d' || d' t d' 8 || 
 I " s r n 11 d t, d s II 8 r t, d Ij n d r t, II 
 |r 8 t, d|jPis,rd||mrd t, j| d s, t, r 
 
 I s t d' r' II d' t ri 8 11 8 d' r' t II 8 r' 8 n || 
 
 The manual-signs may be used to advantage in the 
 above. EXAMPLE.-Teacher intimates that those who 
 know which tone is sung on a particular number (any 
 number may b e taken equally with four) will make 
 MANUDL-Siims iH I ''5 manual-sign and cover it until the 
 
 Fad rvrDniere I t ^ , -r -, 
 
 EAR EXERCISES. J Command - Hands out," is given All 
 will then raise hands instant/y without looking at the 
 others. The teacher will then perceive at a glance 
 how many have the correct answer. Much depends 
 on the simultaneous indication of the manual-signs, ^ 
 ^ as if done slpwly copying will certainly be the result 
 See Ear Cultivation, page 52. - -■..,\. 
 
io6 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 TEACHING SCHOOL SONGS. 
 
 Rote songs have been described in a former chapter 
 (page 60). The songs to be taught " by note " at this 
 stage should consist only of the tones and rhythms 
 already studied. The same methods will be employed 
 for teaching the tune as for sight-singing, described 
 above. When the tune has been thoroughly learnt 
 and vocalised, the words should be studied separately, 
 and the thoughts which they contain should form the 
 subject of a " talk " between teacher and pupils. It 
 may, perhaps, be advisable to practice the words and 
 music until they are sung mechanically correct before 
 taking up the subject of expression. 
 
 Example 
 
 KeyG. 
 
 {fboxnim anb iBvcninQ. 
 
 \ 
 
 d :- 
 
 :d 
 
 I. When 
 
 the 
 
 2. When 
 
 the 
 
 r :— 
 
 :r 
 
 In 
 
 the 
 
 And 
 
 the 
 
 m :— 
 
 :m 
 
 That's 
 
 the 
 
 Let 
 
 a 
 
 s :— 
 
 :m 
 
 Songs 
 For 
 
 of 
 the 
 
 ear 
 even 
 
 east 
 light 
 
 S 
 
 time 
 grate 
 
 s : 
 
 wel 
 night 
 
 :d 
 
 ly 
 
 ing 
 
 • *T 
 
 with 
 fades 
 
 :— :n 
 
 to 
 ful 
 
 come 
 of 
 
 r :ri :r 
 
 morn 
 shades 
 
 from 
 
 r :d 
 
 be 
 hymn 
 
 'I 
 
 to 
 qui 
 
 is, 
 are 
 
 r :d :r 
 
 gold - - en 
 
 the 
 
 :r 
 
 a 
 be 
 
 ti :d :r 
 
 the 
 et 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 d :— :si 
 
 break - - ing 
 steal - - ing 
 
 m 
 
 ray, 
 west, 
 
 PI : 
 
 wak 
 peal 
 
 day. 
 rest. 
 
 :/■' 
 
 Ul| 
 
 - ing 
 
 - ing 
 
 1... 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION I. . I07 
 
 We will suppose that the tune and words of the 
 above song have been sung fairly well, without any- 
 special reference having been made to expression. 
 The pupils will now be prepared for a " talk " on the 
 subject in which they will be led to discover whatever 
 beauties the song may contain. 
 
 EXAMPLE,, 
 
 Teacher. — You have sung this song very nicely, but I wonder 
 whether you have been thinking of its meaning. Can you tell me 
 what you have been singing about ? ' 
 
 Class. — About " Morning and Evening." 
 
 Teacher. — Quite right. In what part of the song do we sing of 
 morning ? 
 
 Class. — In the first verse. 
 
 Teacher. — And in what part, of evening ? ' 
 
 Class. — In the second verse. 
 
 Teacher. — Let us take the first two lines and think of them only 
 for a little. Can you tell me why morn is spoken of as breaking 
 in the east ? 
 
 Class. — It means that the sun rises in the east. 
 
 Teacher. — With what kind of ray does the morning break ? 
 
 Class. — With golden ray. " 
 
 Teacher. — If any of you are in the habit of rising in the early 
 morning, you will be able to tell me what a sunrise looks like. 
 
 Class. — It is bright. It is beautiful. It is very pretty. 
 
 Teacher. — ^You are all correct. It is one of the grandest sights 
 that anyone can witness. How do you think we should sing of 
 this grand picture ? (No answer.) Do you think we should sing 
 as if we felt sorry that the sun had risen so grand and bright ? 
 
 Class. — (Smiling). No ; we should be happy and bright. 
 
 Teacher. — Then we must sing that brightly and lively, and when 
 you do so I want you to think of the bright sunrise and imagine 
 that you see it with your eyes. I will watch your faces, and if 
 you really think of w^R you are singing, I am sure that they will 
 look bright and happy too. (Class sings first two lines with expres« 
 sive brightness.) 
 
" Io8 THE 'IKACHEU'S HANDPOOK. 
 
 Teacher. — That certainly did sound much better, and you looked 
 much happier also. We will now study the remainder of the verse. 
 At what time are we to be awaking songs of welcome ? 
 
 Class. — In the early morning. * „, , V 
 
 Teacher. — Yes, that's the time. And what sort of songs are songs 
 of welcome ? Do you think we should welcome the day with a 
 careless, lazy kind of song, or a bright, hearty song ? 
 
 Class. — With a bright, hearty song. 
 
 Teacher. — You will now sing the whole verse, and you must sing 
 as if you were leally giving a hearty welcome to something which 
 you are pleased to have. 
 
 This will be followed by a similar " talk " on the 
 
 'second verse, in which the characteristics of evening, 
 
 the twilight fading in the west, and the hymn of 
 
 gratitude and prayer for quiet repose are contrasted 
 
 with the brightness and light-heartedness of the 
 
 morning. 
 
 The above method may he considered tedious and 
 
 unnecessary. Some teachers may consider it quite 
 
 sufficient to U// the pupils to sing the first verse 
 
 lively, or loudly, and the second 
 
 softly. This would certainly result 
 
 MECHANirU 
 EXPRESSIUN. 
 
 in the song being sung with a certain degree of 
 expression, but it could only be of a mechanical, 
 unintelligent description, productive of no educa- 
 tional advantage. Its importance cannot be too 
 strongly urged upon the teacher. If pupils are 
 trained to think intelligently of what they sing at 
 this early stage, the practice of " singing with the 
 heart and not with the lips only" will become a 
 confirmed habit, and in a short tjftie they will learn 
 to investigate for themselves and discover new 
 beauties in all they undertake. This will surely 
 
»".(' 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION I. 
 
 109 
 
 recompense the thoughtful teacher for the care 
 bestowed upon the subject during the few minutes 
 occupied in teaching the lesson. Dr. Arnold once 
 
 said to his pupils, " You come here, 
 not to read, but to learn how to read.'* 
 
 "LCARNINQ How." 
 
 This principle of 'beaming how" should unfailingly 
 be applied in teaching how to sing with the undei- 
 standing. 
 
 VOICE-TRAiNING. 
 
 During this stage no elaborate exercises for voice- 
 training are necessary ; in fact, one simple chordal 
 exercise is sufficient for all practical purposes. All 
 exercises should be sung with a soft, pure quality of 
 tone. Attention should be given principally to the 
 formation of correct methods in singing, and the 
 eradication of whatever faulty habits may have already 
 been formed. The tone should be delivered with 
 precision and thrown well forward in the mouth. 
 For this purpose, syllables composed of the consonant 
 k and the various vowels will be found most useful. 
 The mouth should be opened widely. The vowel ah 
 is the most useful for this purpose. Ai and ee should 
 at first be avoided on account of the tendency to sing 
 them with the mouth almost closed. 
 
 Example :— 
 
 d :m Is :m Id :— I— : 
 
 Exercises in 
 " Attack." 
 
 Resonance. 
 
 Koo koo koo koo koo . . 
 Ko ko ko ko ko . . 
 Kaa kaa kaa kaa kaa.. 
 
 Scah 
 
 Oh 
 
 Oo 
 
 , Oo oh ah oh 00 . . 
 
 • •••*• 
 

 IIO THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 The preceding may be commenced in the key of C 
 and gradually raised to A, provided proper care is 
 taken to prevent forcing of voice. If the exercise is 
 softly sung no danger need be feared, as the registers 
 will take care of themselves naturally. In the last 
 form of the exercise the forward delivery of tone 
 which naturally accompanies the vowel oo must be 
 retained in singing oh and ah^ the shape of the mouth 
 being gradually altered for each vowel. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION n. 
 
 LESSON ON THIRD STEP. 
 Prepare blackboard by writing diagram of second 
 step modulator, leaving space between m and s, ^\ 
 and s and t Drill class in singing from modu- j., 
 lator. Give ear exercises in which pupils antici- ^, 
 pate a new tone. Which tone is sung on No. ^ 
 .4, Teacher singing \.olaa^^v\ d slid m d r || 
 d S d m !|d m d f *|| The three first exercises ■ , 
 will prepare for the fourth, in which the new „* 
 tone will be discovered at once. ^^ .^^ , , 
 
 T^ocA^r.— Which tone did you hear on No. 4 ? . V v , 
 
 C/a5£. — A new tone. 
 
 Teacher. — I will sing the same phrase again, and you will sing 
 it after me. (Repeats ph ase, class imitate.) At what place in 
 the scale shall we place the new tone ? 
 
 C/a55. — Between m and s. 
 
 Teacher — Quite correct. The name of the new tone is fab. 
 (Writes it in position.) Now sing from my pointing. (Points 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION II. Ill 
 
 dsdmdddfff m.) You seem to have a little difficulty in singing 
 fah, but you will find it much easier when you have studied its 
 mental effect. Listen while I sing, and tell me what you think of 
 the character of fah. (Sings several phrases in which fah is made 
 prominent.) 
 
 Class. — It has a dull sound ; it is solemn ; it is gloomy. (Such 
 answers may not be given at first, but a repetition of the exercises 
 will elicit them readil_> . The writer has received as many as sixteen 
 difterent answers to this question, all tending to show that pupils 
 had grasped the idea of the mental effect of the new tone.) 
 
 Teacher. — There seems to be a difference of opinion regarding 
 the character of fah. Let me try to help you. Just suppose that 
 you are at play in the yard, when a boy comes up to one of you 
 and tells you that there is a policeman in the schoolroom wishing 
 to speak to you. How do you think you would feel about it ? 
 
 Class. — We would feel rather serious. 
 
 Teacher. — But suppose this same boy should run up to you and 
 tell you that ♦• Teacher says you are to have a half-holiday," how 
 would you feel about it ? 
 
 Class. — We would feel happy. 
 
 Teacher. — Now that you see the difference between these two 
 situations, perhaps you will be able to tell me which one fah most 
 resembles. 
 
 Class. — The serious one. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes, fah is really a very serious, gloomy tone. Now 
 practise singing from the modulator, and think of the effect of fah 
 each time you sing it. - i- 
 
 As soon as possible after fah has been taught, lah 
 should be introduced, as fah is more easily sung 
 when in connection with lah and doh. The same ' 
 method as above will be used, being careful to approach 
 lah from fah, thus : || d f f s || d f f 1 || The men- 
 tal efifeet of lah is sad and plaintive. 
 
 Great care must be taken to impress the difference 
 in the mental effect of the tones fah and lah, as they 
 resemble each other to a certain extent. 
 
113 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 " Pupils should not be kept too long on this lesson, 
 as the mental effect of the new tones is so depressing 
 that they will quickly become dull and even unable 
 to respond readily to your questioning. The intro- 
 duction of some bright song, previously learnt, will 
 serve to counteract the depression. 
 
 MODULATOR DRILL. 
 
 The introduction of lah and lah com- 
 pletes the scale and permits of an almost 
 endless variety of melodic combinations. 
 As in the previous steps, the new tones 
 should receive special attention until 
 their mental effect has been firmly estab- 
 lished. Owing to the marked leading 
 tendency of fah towards me there is 
 always a danger of flattening in pitch 
 when practising the new tones. This 
 must be guarded against from the outset, 
 as the habit once formed is exceedingly 
 difHcult to rectify. The effect of fah 
 and lah can be more clearly impressed 
 when contrasted with the brighter tones 
 of the scale, as :— d PI d *S || d m d *f || 
 
 sd'tM'||sd'tn!d'td'*s||ditd'*l|| 
 
 In Division II. simple exercises only are 
 given, the more difficult intervals being 
 reserved for Division III. The method 
 described on page 90 should be employed 
 in modulator drill at this stage. 
 
 THIRD STEP 
 MODULATOR. 
 
 ml 
 
 r' ■ 
 
 DOH' 
 TE 
 
 LAH 
 
 SOH 
 
 FAH 
 ME 
 
 RAY 
 
 DOH 
 
 t, 
 
 S| 
 
 f. 
 m, 
 
i . 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION II. I13 
 
 SIGHT-SINGING. 
 
 %• vr 
 
 Dunng- this stage the teacher may unconsciously 
 introduce unnecessarily difficult intervals, unless the 
 lessons have been previously prepared. The simplest 
 form of approach to the tones f or 1 is from the tones 
 of the Fah chord, thus ;— d nsdfld'l fm rrd. 
 The following rule will serve as a g^ide in composing 
 exercises for sight-singing. Approach f and 1 by 
 chordal leap, or by step, from the tones immediately 
 above or below, all other tones may be approached 
 by leap. 
 
 Exercises. Keys C to E^. Compass t, to d*. ' •. ■ 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 PI 
 
 f 
 
 1 d' 
 
 1 f n 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 B 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 f s 
 
 1 8 d' 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 s 
 
 m 
 
 f f 
 
 8 1 8 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 d 
 
 r 
 
 t, 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 f r 
 
 8 1 f 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 1 8 
 
 d' 1 1 
 
 8 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 d* 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 d< 
 
 t 
 
 d' 1 
 
 1 f r 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 Exercises in which the tones move by step followed 
 by a sudden leap occasion a slight difficulty. They 
 are useful in checking the tendency to anticipate, and 
 in cultivating close attention. 
 
 Exercise i. Key C. '' " ■> 
 
 d r m 
 
 f 8 d< t 1 8 
 
 m r 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 d 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Key F. 
 
 
 ^>, ;'•; 
 
 
 
 m d r 
 
 8 f m r ti d 
 
 r t, 
 
 d 
 
 r 
 
 d 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Key G. 
 
 
 
 
 
 d t, 1, 
 
 ti d r m 8 f 
 
 m r 
 
 d 
 
 1. 
 
 d 
 
'\ 
 
 114 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Exercise 4. Key G. 
 
 m d f m r d 1| S| 1| ti r d t| d 
 
 Exercise 5. Key A. • 
 
 d ti d S| f| n, f, si ti r ti d S| m, 
 
 Exercise 6. Key "&). 
 
 d S| m, d| f| S| li ti d f r d S| d 
 
 The methods of employing rhythmic exercises, 
 and colors, described in the previous chapter, apply 
 equally to this step. 
 
 ;, -ri ,-;/-.•/' " ■>/■ TIME. 
 
 Lesson on Half-Pulse Continuations. 
 Prepare blackboard with two four-pulse measures. 
 
 d :r |m :m.r|d :d.ti|d :— 
 
 Review. 
 
 Teacher. — You have already learned how to 
 
 sing whole-pulse tones, half-pulse tones, and 
 
 prolonged tones, and to-day we will study some 
 
 new combinations in rhythm. In this exercise, can you tell me 
 
 how many tones we have which are only one pulse long ? 
 
 Class. — Four. 
 
 r^acAcr.— How many are two pulses long ? 
 Class. — One. ..>■.• 
 
 Teacher. — And how many pulses are divided into halves ? 
 Class. — Two. ,: p i^' 'j, . ' .- ■ ■;■■ • i ' <• - ^r . i. j ■■> 
 
 Teacher. — Now tell me the time-names for each pulse as I point 
 
 to it. 
 
 Class.— TsMf Taa, Taa, Taa-tai, Taa. Taa-tai, 
 
 Taa-aa. 
 
 Teacher. — You will now sing the time-names 
 
 Introduction of 
 AA Tai. 
 
 as I point. (Class sings as desired.) Now sing to laa while I beat 
 time. (Class sings as desired.) You can sing that correctly, and 
 will now be able to tell whether I sing it without any mistake. 
 (Sings it correctly to laa while pupils listen.) Did I make any 
 mistake ? 
 Class. — No. 
 
 y 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION II. ,. w IIC , . 
 
 Teacher.— Listen once more. (Sings as before, prolonging third 
 tone half-way through fourth pulse.) Did you notice any mistake ? 
 
 Class. — Yes. ^ 
 
 Teacher. — In which pulse was the mistake made ? 
 
 Class. — In the fourth pulse. 
 
 Teacher. — Did I sing both of the tones in the fourth pulse ? . 
 
 Class. — No ; you omitted the first one. 
 
 Teacher. — I did omit the first one ; but, can you tell me whether - 
 I sang anything in its place ? 
 
 Class. — You continued the third tone into the fourth pulse. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite right. The time-name for this rhythm is taa-aa- 
 tai. Please sing it after me. (Gives pattern, tsa-aa-tai, and class 
 sing it repeatedly, in order to catch the effect of the new rhythm. )• 
 You can now sing that nicely and I think will be able to tell me 
 how to wn.te its notation. We will rub out the first note in the 
 fourth pulse. What sign do we use to express a continued tone ? 
 
 Class. — A dash. 
 
 Teacher, — Yes ; we usually have a long dash for the continuation 
 through a full pulse, but as this tone has only to be continued 
 through half a pulse we will use a short dash. (Writes I {[ ;— ,d L ) 
 You will now see how we get the tim<i-names for tnis rhythm. 
 What is the time-name for the third pulse note ? 
 
 Class. — Taa. 
 
 Teacher. — For the continuation ? 1 ' ' - v .' ' 
 
 Class. — Aa, .■ V * : ,.>^ ■ ,■■ .•:!': ' 
 
 Teacher. — And for the last half of a pulse ? . ".' ; . • • « ' \ 
 
 Class. — Tai. 
 
 (Writes from' pupils' dictation M ;- ,d I *' -' j 
 
 '* ' Taa-ka-Tail) ^ '' * 
 
 Teacher. — We will now practise singing this new rhythm in tune. 
 Please sing it to the time-names ; now to the 
 syllables on one tone. (In the latter, pupils 
 will probably fail. Some will sing ray at fourth 
 
 SiNoiNQ IN Tune. 
 
 beat instead of continuing me. This may be overcome by slightly 
 accenting the continuation at fourth pulse, or by using colored 
 crayons as follows : — ^Teacher writes the m and the dash in blue, 
 and the r in orange.) What is the color of m ? Of the dash ? 
 Class. — Blue. 
 
Il6 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Teacher. — If both are of the same color, does it not indicate that 
 they should have the same sound ? 
 
 Class, — Yes ; they should be the same. ^ * 
 
 Teacher. — Is r of the same color as the others ? ^ . v 
 
 Class. — No ; it is orange. ' ' v > : • 
 
 Teacher. — Then if the color is changed we should certainly 
 change the sound. Does the color change at the beginning of the 
 pulse or at the middle ? 
 
 Class. — At the middle. ' " " 
 
 Teacher. — Then you must be careful not to sing ray at the begin- 
 ning of the pulse, but to prolong me half-way through, and then 
 
 sing ray. -'■■^\i\' • .;■, ; ; .'. ; ■, .. : .•C.^arv 'n^.•:.|«. f j7 
 
 When the exercise has been correctly sung it should 
 be followed by ear exercises in which the teacher 
 sings phrases of several measures in length while the 
 pupils listen for the new rhythm, and tell the number 
 of times it occurs in each phrase. 
 
 In practice it will be found neces- 
 sary to employ various means of 
 
 Praotioe. 
 
 securing correctness in singing the new rhythm. The 
 color method will be found the most useful for training 
 the eye. This may be supplemented by the empha- 
 sizing of the prolongation of the vowel sound, thus : — 
 
 Im :— .r Id :— .mis :-~.f In :— 11^ 
 
 JMe e JDoh oh jSoh oh I || 
 
 It should also be pointed out that the ear naturally 
 expects the last half of the pulse to lead and connect 
 with the pulse which follows. 
 
 Ex. I. Keys D to A. 
 
 a. Id :d.r |n :— .r Id :d .t| |d :— 11 
 
 b. Id :~.r In :— .r Id :d .ti |d :— 
 
 ^■' ,'-■' 
 
117 
 
 NOTES 0.\ hIVfSION II. 
 
 /I* •-•' I" :".rjd :d.t, Id 
 ''jd :-.r In j-.r |d :-t, |d 
 ' jd .-.r I PI :in.r Id :-.t, |d 
 
 A fresh difficulty will be experienced when -aa L 
 IS immediately followed by Taa-Ta,. 
 Ex- 3. Sams Kkvs AS ABOVE :'.!'■ 
 
 " \^ =-•' 1" ,---f |B.f :n.r |d 
 * jd :-.r |n.f :a .f .„ ^ |^ 
 
 II 
 
 ^ |d.r:P..f Is :_^|„ .„^ ,^ 
 
 ''• I d .r -.m 
 '• I d J :i«i 
 
 f :— .8 If :n.t |d 
 — :— .f Is .f :n.r |d 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 thlt^'^f '' exceptionally difficult when'it occurs in 
 three-pulse measure. The most common error is to 
 
 rut: ' '"'" -nfnuation followed by half! 
 
 Ex. 3. Keys C or D. 
 
 '^|d :r :n jf j-.g-i u .__ 
 |w :-.f:B 11 :- 
 
 - jd :-.r:m |f :_ .__ jg .. j 
 ^•|d :~ ;~jr ^jnj js :-.i 
 ^ |d :-.r:in |f :-.g:i jt ._.t 
 
 d' 
 d' 
 
 |d. 
 t id> 
 
 t Id 
 
 I 
 
 11 
 W 
 
Il8 ' '^ THE teacher's HANDBOOK. ' ( ' ' 
 
 The preceding may be converted into secondary 
 measure by commencing on the weak accent, and 
 deducting one pulse from the length of the last note. 
 
 SILENT PULSES. (RESTS.) ^•^- '* " 
 
 In teaching a first lesson on si/ent pulses, the same 
 methods as described in the foregoing specimen 
 lessons may be adopted, viz.: — The new rhythm 
 introduced in ear exercises by the teacher, detected 
 and imitated by the pupils, and developed by appro- 
 priate interrogation. Theoretically, it seems an ano- 
 maly to use a time-name to express a silence, but, 
 practically, it will be found exceedingly valuable. 
 The sensation of pulses in music is so powerful that 
 unless something is provided to be sung on the stroke 
 of the silent pulse, untrained pupils will invariably 
 sing the succeeding tone. The act of whispering the 
 time-name involves a certain degree of restraint which 
 compels the singer to observe the silence when 
 singing in tune. The pupils should at first sing all 
 the time-names, then the teacher may sing those for 
 the silent pulses, and finally the pupils will sing all 
 but the silent pulses, merely thinking t\\Q time-names 
 as they occur in the exercise. 
 
 Ex. 4. Keys C to A. i 
 
 a. Id ::r In : If :m.r Id 
 
 \: '^r^ 
 
 II 
 
 ^. |d.r :n | :f ,m|r : jd :- 
 c. Id : |r .m :f .nlr : jd :~ 
 
 II 
 
NOTIiS ON DIVISION II. 
 
 119 
 
 d. Id :r 
 
 :n 
 
 f :m .r I d ;— 
 
 ^ Id :- .r |m :f .m|r : 
 
 Ex. 5. Keys C or D. ^ i-i 
 
 a. Id : :r jm : :f is :1 
 
 ^ Id :r : |m :f : |s :1 
 
 II 
 
 ^ Id : :r |m :f :s |1 :t 
 
 ^. Id :r : 
 
 :m :f Is :1 
 
 e. Id :r :m 
 
 :f :s II : 
 
 t |d< 
 t ld< 
 
 t Id 
 
 t Id 
 
 • 
 
 =, II 
 
 EAR EXERCISES. 
 
 
 \i 
 
 These will be conducted by exactly the same 
 methods as prescribed for Division I. Care must 
 be observed in impressing the mental efifects of f, 1 
 and m, as, owing to their seeming resemblance, one is 
 frequently mistaken for the other. This difficulty 
 may readily be overcome by frequent comparison of 
 the tones, as :— d S d *m || d S d *f || d S d *1 || 
 d> s dinild' s d'^'mlld' s d> f II 
 
 Exercises in finding fah : — • ' *' 
 
 .i\ } 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 
 8 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 f 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 s 
 
 d 
 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 f 
 
 s 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 f 
 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 m 
 
 d 
 
 (r 
 
I20 
 
 S 1 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOlC. 
 
 Exercises in finding lah 
 
 
 ■ '■i- 
 
 .^;. 
 
 '.(;'', 
 
 i? 
 
 I 
 
 s 
 d 
 
 2 
 
 d' 
 
 m s 1 
 d f 
 
 3 4 5 
 
 t d' 1 
 
 
 r 1 e 
 
 
 1 f B 
 
 
 r f 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 d 
 d' 
 
 B 
 
 d' 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 B 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 d- 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 Exercises on all tones of the scale. Which is last ? 
 
 I 2 
 
 d B 
 
 d t 
 
 m d 
 
 s 1 
 
 3 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 d n 
 
 r 
 
 
 d' s 
 
 1 
 
 
 f r 
 
 B 
 
 
 f B 
 
 m 
 
 • 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 B 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 d< 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 m 
 
 f 
 
 The above will be followed by exercises in naming 
 any one tone sung to a/t or o/i. The teacher will 
 soi-/a the chord d' B n d, then sing to a/i or o/i any 
 one tone. Pupils will then give the sol-fa name of 
 the tone. , . , 
 
 ; . PREPARED SONG. ^IH -"i 
 
 This will be taught in the manner described for 
 Div. I. Seepages 57 and 106. . , , , , 
 
 u ■ 
 
 ■ X ■ 
 
 f''.. 
 
 '■ 
 
 i^ 
 
 i 
 
 , -'■'.» 
 
 
 ■■," ■' 
 
 f ; 
 
 [■' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ > '' 
 
 ,'/■ 
 
 ^ ' 
 
 ■■^A' 
 
 ., i:. 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 >..'' 
 
 
 ::.|. 
 
 , ', ■ :(i 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION HL 
 
 "■ ■'■■ i 121 
 
 CHAPTER Xill. 
 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION lU. 
 
 
 MODULATOR DRILL. 
 
 
 In this Division pupils are expected to sing any tones 
 of the scale, irrespective of the interval by which they 
 may be approached. The simpler intervals having 
 been taught in the preceding division, the more diffi- 
 cult intervals will now demand attention. The inter- 
 vals which usually occasion the most trouble are 
 sixths, as d 1, 1| f, t r, and fourths, as f d, Pi t|, n 1. 
 When two such intervals are given in succession, as 
 S| d f, r S d', the difficulty is considerably increased. 
 The following are a few of the more difficult intervals 
 included in this step : — m 1, 1 n, d f, d 1, 1 r', 1| r, 
 
 r' 1, m t„ ti m, t, f, f t, r t, t r, 1 d, f 1,, 1, f. 
 
 In every lesson one or more of the above should be 
 specially taught, but should be intermingled with 
 simpler intervals in order that the pupils may not be 
 discouraged by too many difficulties. The method 
 described on page 78 for teaching soh should be freely 
 employed in teaching fah and lall. 
 
 Examples of exercises for Modulator Drill and 
 Sight-Singing: 
 
 Key C. " ■:>^l.^'' \ "/v. ■:;•■?■..?■ • ;.■■/, 
 
 dnsd'tllsflfmnllmrrlfrdtid 
 s d' t 1 d' 1 1 d' r' r' 1 r' m' 1 1 8 1 f 1 f r 1 t d' 
 dsffnrfmdfslflttftd'fmfrd 
 dfnlffslfd'fmdfrfmrfdfrt, d 
 
122 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 ' Key E. 
 
 d s 1 m f r 8 d. f m r 1 t Ts d' t 1 f r d t| d 
 
 Key a. 
 
 d S| n, Si li fi B| d r f m d 1| tj Si d fi m, 1, S| d ti d 
 
 Key F. 
 
 dt|dsil. dfnlfsmfrtidsmlfsrd 
 
 SIGHT-SINGING FROM BOOKS. 
 When music books are introduced into the school- 
 room for the first time, teachers are frequently sur- 
 prised at the difficulty which pupils experience in 
 singing exercises less difficult than many which they 
 have previously sung from the blackboard. The 
 explanation is simple. In blackboard exercises the 
 teacher usually points to each pulse as it is sung, 
 consequently every eye is concentrated on a particular 
 point, and "losing the place" is an impossibility; 
 but when books are used pupils have to find each 
 pulse for themselves, hence the confusion which usu- 
 ally results. At this stage special 
 gymnastics in " eye training " should 
 
 Eye Training. 
 
 be given, both from blackboard and books, and the 
 practice of pointing to the pulse signs should be 
 discontinued. ;/ • 
 
 EXAMPLE OF METHOD. 
 
 Write on the blackboard an exercise containing 
 continued tones and divided pulses, as : — 
 
 I :m Is :n.d 
 
 r :d.ti|d :— I 
 n :r.r |d :— 11 
 
 Teacher.— I will now tap the pulses of this tune, and you will 
 watch each pulse as I tap. Should I stop before reaching the end 
 
 ;— I n :d.r 
 
 r ■ 
 
Vi • 
 
 -'H 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION III. • I23 
 
 you will show me on which pulse I stop. (Taps audibly without 
 pointing to the pulses, ending on the seventh pulse.) Tell me on 
 which pulse I finished. . - , . 
 
 Class. — On the second pulse of the second measure. 
 
 Teacher. — Will someone point to the last pulse that was tapped ? 
 (Pupil points to d in the pulse previous to the correct one.) No 
 doubt you think that is the correct pulse, but you have been 
 watching v -*es, not pulses. Try once more and watch the pulses 
 only, no matter how many notes they may contain. 
 
 if This will invariably lead to correct answers being 
 
 given. The same method should be followed with 
 simple exercises in printed books, or the teacher may 
 
 II i sing the exercise to /aa while pupils potni to each pulse. 
 When the teacher stops singing, each pupil should be 
 
 ji able to point to the exact pulse on which the pause 
 
 ^' is made. Exercises containing full-pulse tones only 
 should be used at first, and gradually increased in 
 
 JI difficulty until the books can be used with the same 
 
 ^s freedom as the blackboard. 
 
 ,■ <■- ■■ -. 
 
 ' -. ■• ' * TIME. 
 
 The division of the pulse into quarters may be 
 taught by the methods described on page 86 for half- 
 pulses. No difficulty need be experienced when 
 singing on one tone ; but when singing in tune is 
 attempted, there will be a decided inclination to 
 slacken the tempo whenever quarter-pulses make their 
 appearance. This may be overcome by sol-faing on 
 one tone previous to singing in tune, and also by 
 directing pupils to aim at singing in strict time the 
 first note of the pulse which follows the divided pulse. 
 If this habit is once formed the divided pulses will 
 soon be found to take care of themselves. 
 
 11 
 
 M 
 
124 * THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 *■,■ ■■': 
 
 Exercises in quarter pulses : 
 
 |d :r .r |m :r^.r,r|d :t, .t, |d :— N 
 W :r,r.r,r|m :r .r Id :ti,t,.ti^,|d t; | 
 
 
 C. 
 
 e. 
 
 ■fv, ' * ■,•,:■/,'■■{ 
 
 
 EAR EXERCISES. 
 
 , ■> 
 
 :r,r,r,r|m :r |d,d.d,d:t, .ti |d :— || 
 M :r |m,m.m,m:r .r Id :t,ti.t„ti|d it:, || 
 
 ift :r ,r |m,m.PT,n:r |d,d.d,d:ti .ti |d ' :— 11 
 With change of tone : — 
 
 |i :r .r |m :f |s :s,f.m,r|d ;— || 
 .|l :d,r.m,f|s :— Is :s,f.n,rld :- || 
 
 :d,r.m,f|s :s,f:n,r|d :t, .t, |d :— II 
 
 Id :d,r.m,f|s ^ j8*t^€ |s,f;n,r:d .t| |d :— [I 
 |d :— !d,r.m,f:8,f.m,r|d :t, |j| :- ii 
 
 The first class of ear exercises prescribed for Div. 
 III. are similar to those prescribed for Div. II. 
 
 The second class comprise the simplest form of 
 exercises containing more than one tone. In prepar- 
 ing for those exercises it must be made clear to the 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION HI. 
 
 I2i 
 
 pupils that only three tones in stepwise order will be 
 given. They may also be required to name three 
 such tones, beginning with any tone indicated by the 
 teacher, thus : — Name three tones ascending in step- 
 wise order from d ; descending from s ; ascending 
 from 1, etc. The teacher may now sing several such 
 phrases to laa^ pupils 'being required to tell only 
 whether the phrase ascends or descends. This should 
 be followed by similar phrases in which they are 
 required simply to name the first tone. When they 
 have learned to distinguish between ascending and 
 descending phrases, and to concentrate their attention 
 on the first tone, there should not be much difficulty 
 experienced in naming any of the phrases required. 
 Previous to singing each phrase, the teacher must 
 sol-fa the DOH chord, in order to clearly define the 
 key. When incorrect answers are given, the attention 
 should be directed to the mental effect of the first 
 tone, and pupils questioned regarding its resemblance 
 to the corresponding tone of the correct answer. 
 When this has been discovered by the majority of the 
 pupils the exercise should be sol-faed by aU. It will 
 be noticed that exercises which begin with d, n or s 
 will be more easily named than those which begin 
 with the other tones of the scale. ,, = ^ >. 
 
 d r m 
 
 m r d 
 
 d t, 1, 
 
 s f m 
 
 s 1 t 
 
 d> t 1 
 
 d' r' ml 
 
 m f s 
 
 f n r 
 
 r n f 
 
 r d t, 
 
 f s 1 
 
 1 s f 
 
 1 t d' 
 
 t 1 s 
 
 t. d r 
 
 B| 1| ti 
 
 li t, d 
 
 r' d't 
 
 t| li Si 
 
126 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 Exercises in which the tones move by step, but not. 
 continuously in one direction, may now hn given. 
 
 d 
 s 
 r 
 f 
 
 t, 
 f 
 m 
 s 
 
 d 
 
 d r d 
 
 d d r 
 
 d d t, 
 
 m r m 
 
 s 
 
 sis 
 
 s s 1 
 
 m r r 
 
 m f m 
 
 r 
 
 r r d 
 
 r d r 
 
 t 1 t 
 
 t t d' 
 
 f 
 
 s f f 
 
 1 t 1 
 
 d' t d' 
 
 1 s 1 
 
 «»': 
 
 Singing from dictation may now be proceeded with 
 and will be found an excellent auxiliary to ear 
 training and sight-singing. The teacher may indicate 
 
 by the manual signs which tones are 
 to be sung to laUy or may simply 
 
 SiNCINQ FROM 
 
 Dictation. 
 
 name them, thus : — Teacher sings d S n d and tells 
 class to sing Pi r d, or any of above phrases which 
 may be desired. In all exercises the pupils who 
 display feast natural ability to tell tones by ear should 
 receive special attention and should be encouraged 
 to persevere until they compare favorably with the 
 others. See pages 52 and 10 1. 
 
 
 PREPARED SONGS. -^ 
 
 These will necessarily contain greater difficulties of 
 tune and time, and be of a superior character gener- 
 ally than those prescribed for Div. II, but should be 
 taught by the same methods. See page 106. 
 
 VOICE TRAINING. 
 
 Tuning exercises in two parts should now be intro- 
 duced. It is advisable to teach the lower part 
 thoroughly before touching the upper part, as young 
 
f> 
 
 NOTES ON DIVISION III. 
 
 127 
 
 pupils are invariably inclined to sing the latter, 
 to which the ear is unconsciously attracted more 
 strongly than to the former. The pupils should be 
 divided into two sections, according to the quality of 
 
 the voice. A trained ear will easily 
 distinguish the soprano from the con- 
 
 CLAS8IFYINQ V010E8. 
 
 tralto by the quality of the speaking voice, but the 
 ordinary teacher should not attempt to classify voices 
 without first testing each voice in singing from the 
 modulator. This may be done by singing up and 
 down in the key of C. If the best tones are found 
 in the upper-thick register, the voice may be presumed 
 to be contralto ; but if in the lower and upper-thin 
 registers, soprano will be the most suitable part for 
 that particular voice. See page 23. Each part 
 should be practised separately, beginning with the 
 
 softest possible tone and endeavoring 
 to have all voices in a part blended 
 
 Beqin Softly. 
 
 as one. Pupils who will persist in singing loudly 
 should be prohibited from singing for a time. The 
 most suitable vowel for elementary tuning of voices 
 is 00. When the voices in each part have been fairly 
 well blended, the two parts may be combined, and the 
 vowels ah^ oh^ ai and ee introduced individually in the 
 order given. ' 
 
 Examples of Tuning Exercises : — ^ ^ 
 
 KeyG. 
 
 PI :f 
 d :1, 
 
 81 
 
 :r 
 :t, 
 
 n :— 
 d :- 
 
128 
 
 THE TEACHER :, HANDBOOK. 
 
 KeyG. 
 
 i d :r 
 
 m 
 
 :f 
 
 m 
 
 :r 
 
 d :- 
 
 d :t, 
 
 d 
 
 :1. 
 
 B| 
 
 • 
 
 d :- 
 
 > y 
 
 i >- CHAPTER XIV. ^ 
 
 > i fV . KOTES ON DIVISION IV. 
 
 !; ■ V" MODULATOR DRILL. * ;' ' 
 
 The first modulator drill for this Division is exactly 
 the same as prescribed for Division III. 
 
 ' In order to conduct two-part exercises successfully 
 it is necessary that the teacher should have a know- 
 ledge of the elementary principles of harmony, in order 
 that ungrammatical harmonic progressions may be 
 avoided, and those only introduced which are calculat- 
 ed to produce a pleasing harmonic effect. The most 
 pleasing *intervals are t/ttrds, as : — d m ||r f || 1| d || 
 f 1 II S tlL When thirds oxAy are used they become 
 too sweet and insipid, and a new combination is 
 necessary. This is supplied by sixths, which are 
 simply inverted thirds, as : — d 1 1| r 1 1| m d' || 1| f || t| S ||. 
 A strong binding effect is produced by the employ- 
 ment oi fifths, as :— d S |j r 1 1| f d' II, or their inversions 
 termed fourths, as :— S| d ||1 r' ||d f ||. These, how- 
 ever, must be employed with extreme 
 caution, and on no account should 
 
 Avoid CoNSEOUTiVE 
 Fifths. 
 
 * Intervals are calculated from the lower to the higher tone, both 
 being included. 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION IV. 
 
 139 
 
 two fifths, as 
 
 in suc- 
 
 i . '■ 
 
 cession. The effect of such " consecutive fifths '* is 
 harsh and unpleasant. As a rule, four or five thirds 
 or sixths in succession will be suflficient, and a fourth 
 or fifth should be added to give variety to the 
 harmony. The following will serve to illustrate : — 
 
 Key Et7. ^ 
 
 d PI s ni 
 
 r f m f 
 
 s 1 f f 
 
 n f s 1 ) 
 
 d d t, d 
 
 t, t, d - 
 
 t| d r t| 
 
 ■ '-■/■ ■'' - ' 
 
 d r m f j 
 
 t t d' - 
 
 d' t 1 s 
 
 f 1 s 
 
 It d'- 
 
 f f n - 
 
 m f f n 
 
 r f f n 
 
 r f m -^ 
 
 I 
 
 Before attempting to conduct two part exercises 
 the teacher should carefully prepare a definite plan 
 by writing a number of exercises similar to the above 
 until familiar with the more common harmonic pro- 
 gressions. A few short and simple exercises only 
 should be used in the class until pupils have developed 
 ajnoderate degree of steadiness* in maintaining their 
 own against another part. 
 
 -'...■: *■:.., w. vi •.-■-■-;.;:.■■:■■«"- TIME. 
 
 In this Division no new divisions of rhythm are 
 introduced, but those' already taught should be thon 
 oughly reviewed until they can be easily sung at sight. 
 
 SIGHT-SINGING. 
 
 The exercises prescribed for this Division are 
 intended to enable pupils to sing at sight any ordinary 
 
. ;^ "ii; 
 
 ■' /. ' ' ''■■.■■■ 
 
 130 . THE teacher's HANDBOOK. ' • 
 
 hymn tune or song of moderate difficulty. When 
 tune and time are combined for the first time, one is 
 certain to receive more attention than the other. 
 Before singing each exercise, the attention should be 
 directed to the difference in length of the notes. 
 Each exercise should be vocalised, after sol-faing not 
 more than three times. ' ' 
 
 Exercise i. Key G. 
 
 d :m |r :s If :— |m :f Is :1 |f :r la :— |n :— l 
 f :r Is :— Is :m |1 :— Ir :s Id :f |m :r |d :— 1| 
 
 Exercise 2. Key D. ' 
 
 m :d If :r Is :— |m :— 11 :r |m :f If :— |m :— i 
 s :d' If : -11 :di |s :— |n :d |r :s |t| :r |d :— 11 
 
 Exercise 3. Key A. 
 
 d :ti Id isilm,:— |f| :— Ir, :si 11, :t| 11, :— |si :— I 
 d :m||f|:-|r :d |si:— 11, :d |m:r If :t, |d :--|| 
 
 Exercise 4. Key E. ''''";--■';: '7^';'.,. '•■;.:, J 
 
 d :m |r :t||d:f |m :— 11 :r |s :d|t :r |si :— ) 
 Id :— |r :— jti :si |d :m|f :» |1 :m|f :s jd :— 11 
 
 EAR EXERCISES. 
 
 Exercises containing stepwise progressions should 
 still receive attention. Dictation exercises containing 
 intervals of greater difficulty will prepare for more 
 
NOTES ON DIVISION IV. 
 
 X3I 
 
 advanced ear exercises. In conducting the following 
 exercises the teacher will sing the tones of th 3 DOH 
 chord, then name the tones to be sol-faed by th( class : 
 
 m r 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 r m 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 ';'Vi 
 
 f 
 
 s 
 
 d> s 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 1 f B d 
 
 f m r s 
 
 d< s 1 f 
 
 1 d' f m 
 
 alts 
 d> t d> 8 
 B m B r 
 B n d B| 
 
 d' t [ m 
 
 n f f d 
 
 B 1 f d 
 
 d S| t| d 
 
 In the following the teacher will sing on one tone 
 to iaa while beating time, while the pupils listen, then 
 sing the time-names on one tone : 
 
 d II ld.d :d Id.d 
 
 d 
 d 
 
 :d .d Id 
 :- A Id 
 
 d :-.d 
 |d,d.d4:d 
 
 |d.d 
 d 
 d.d 
 
 :- .d Id .d 
 
 d.d:d 
 
 d.d|| Id 
 d II Id 
 
 d 
 d 
 d.d 
 
 II 
 
 :d,d.d,dld 
 :d4*d,d|d :d .d 
 
 PREPARED SONG. 
 
 The study of two-part songs is usually a more 
 difficult matter than is generally supposed. The 
 upper part is usually more " catching " than the lower, 
 and even when the parts have been thoroughly mas- 
 tered when sung separately, it frequently happens 
 that the alto voices are unconsciously singing with 
 the soprano. This may be overcome by frequent 
 
rt$2 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 practice of tuning exercises and modulator drill in 
 two parts. As a rule it is advisable to teach the 
 lower part before the upper, until sufficient skill has 
 been developed to permit of both parts being sung 
 simultaneously. * . 
 • -V VOICE TRAINING. 
 
 If a reasonable amount of attention has been paid 
 to voice training, pupils should enter this Division 
 with a fair command of voice, an increased compass, 
 and a tone, which if not large in volume, should at 
 • least be pure and soft in its quality. A strict outlook 
 should be kept for voices which are apt to be strained 
 particularly among boys, who usually incline to force 
 
 the lower-thin register upwards in 
 preference to using the upper-thin. 
 
 Train Downwards. 
 
 The upper registers can best be cultivated by singing 
 
 downwards. Exercises for this purpose should begin 
 
 above D' which will compel the use of the upper thin 
 
 The sweetness of this register should be noticed, and 
 
 pupils directed to carry it down as far as possible 
 
 withou* changivg. 
 
 Th: owel oo is the most congenial to this register 
 
 and should precede all others. 
 
 Voice £xbrcises for Upper Registers. 
 Ex. 1. Keys A, At?, G. F % 
 
 js :f |in:r|s:f tw:r|«:f |w :rtwif |fi ^-^| 
 
 Ex. 2. Keys F, E, e!?, D. .% 
 
 jd'it II :b |d':t |1 :s |d':t |1 :b Jl :t ld':H| 
 
 Ex.3. KSYS C, B, Bl7, A. 1^ 
 
 tn':f |«':r'|n':f |n':r'|ni:f |n'n-'|d'it (d' :-tj| 
 
NO IKS ON J )I VISION IV. 
 
 153 
 
 For Whole Compass of Voice. 
 
 Ex. 4. Keys C. D, E. 
 
 m :d |8 :n|f :1 |d>:l 
 
 Ex. 5. Kbys C, D. 
 
 d jn :r .f I n .s 
 
 « 
 
 s :t Ir' :t |d':-|- 
 
 :f .1 Is .t :1 .d> 
 
 .r' 
 
 :d 
 
 «» 
 
 t 
 m'.d' :'r.t IdM :t .s II .f :s .m If .r :d 
 
 Cymnastics in 
 Breathinq. 
 
 II 
 
 The above should first be sung to koo with neatly 
 detached tones (siaccata)y then smoothly (/egato) to oa, 
 auy aiy ee and oh, breath being taken at the points, 
 marked *. 
 
 Breathing exercises should be given 
 frequently in connection with the 
 above. It is inadvisable to multiply exercises. A 
 few simple gymnastics conducted by a careful, obser- 
 vant teacher, should be sufficient for all practical 
 purposes; 
 
 Exercise ist. — Pupils stand erect, take breath by 
 expanding the lower part of the chest while the teacher 
 counts four slowly ; retain the breath by keeping the 
 chest expanded for a similar length of time, then let 
 the breath go suddenly. Repeat three or four times. 
 
 Exercise 2nd. — Inhale by expanding the chest 
 suddenly ; retain the breath for four seconds as above,, 
 then sing the vowel 00 while the teacher counts four. 
 The attention must be concentrated on securing a 
 smooth, steady tone. The period during which the 
 breath is inhaled, or the tone sustained, may gradually 
 be increased to eight seconds ; but it is not advisable 
 to retain the breath be\'ond four seconds.. 
 
134 
 
 THE TEACHtR^S HANDBOOK. 
 
 (,;' .' 
 
 
 'P 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 
 i}\ ■ j. ,( : if. -.■ ■ • ' 
 
 ,; .-, CHAPTER XV. . ,; 
 
 gylLABOS JOB SEHIOB BIVISIOKS. 
 
 
 
 ■ X' ' y 
 
 In Part First the three primary steps of the Tonic 
 Sol-fa method only are treated. The subject-matter 
 of the remaining steps is as follows :— ,\.^; .,^,^...J 
 
 r ,, FOURTH STEP. .^^^n^ s 
 
 Tune.— The standard scale of pitch. Transition to the 
 " ^.,(S first sharp and first flat keys. Simple chromatic 
 / > ! tones. Musical expression. 
 
 Time.— Quarter-pulse silences. Pulses divided into thirds. 
 :^ ' Beating of time. '• -; . S : .-. . 
 
 :/■'•'"'" ■■^■■... • ■ FIFTH STEP. ' - ' .'^'■^' r- ■"-■-'- ''"'^^^ 
 
 Tune.— The minor mode. Transitional modulation. . ., ^ 
 Time.— Pulses divided into sixfAs, eighths and ninths. -,^; ^.■^, 
 
 SIXTH STEP. ;-^''.^>i-j^':;^-;''-'' '"■■'■'■ '-. 
 
 Tune.— Transitions of two or more removes. Transitional 
 modulation. Exceptional chromatic progressions. 
 Time.— Rare divisions of rhythm. 
 
 In pursuance of the plan adopted on page 63, the 
 following syllabus is recommended for use in the 
 senior divisions : 
 
. ' . . ,,, ,, , ,.^ ., ■ ■ ■ ■- y ^ ' ' : ■ 
 
 SYLLABUS FOR SE^fIOR DIVISIONS. ■ 1 35 
 
 DIVISION V. 
 
 Modulator. — (a) To sol-fa from Examiner's pointing on the 
 fourth-step modulator, exercises containing transition of one remove 
 in the perfect method. (6) To sing as above, exercises containing 
 the tones fe and ta in stepwise progression used thus: — s fe 8, d' ta 1. 
 
 , Sight-Singing,— To sol-fa at sight a written or printed exercise 
 including all tones of the Major scale, wiih fe and ta as above, but 
 not necessarily containing any divisions of the pulse less than half- 
 pulses. - . , ,. > -,; ." .-,■ . ,;■,,,........• 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to time-names and laa, exercises 
 containing combinations of quarters and half- pulse tone*. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — To imitate and afterwards name the tones of 
 a simple diatonic phrase of five tones the Examiner may twice sing 
 to laa, the tones of the DOH chord being first given in each case. 
 
 Prepared Song. — To sing in two parts, with due expression and 
 fair quality of tone, a school song set to words. 
 
 f 
 ^ ■ ' , ■ , ' '■' 
 
 'division VI. 
 
 Modulator. — (a) To sol-fa from Examiner's pointing, exercises 
 containing transition of one remove and modulation to the relative 
 minor, including the tone se used thus, 1 se 1. (b) To vocalize, from 
 the Examiner's pointing, simple exercises including all tones of the 
 major diatonic scale. ;\ ,ri; .' . : >r! i 
 
 Sight-Singing. — To sol-fa at sight a written or printed test 
 inclu< g any tones of the major scale and easy transitions of one 
 remove, indicated by bridge-notes. •: ^ 
 
 Time. — (a) To sing on one tone to laa or time-names, exercises 
 including various combinations of thirds, (b) To sing as above, 
 exercises in quick six-pulse measure. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — To imitate and afterwards name the tones of 
 a simple phrase of five tones, including fe or ta. 
 
 Prepared Song. — Same as for Division V. 
 
■»1 ^ 
 
 136 THE TKACHKk's HANDBOOK 
 
 DIVISION VII. 
 
 Modulator. — (a) To sol fa from Examiner's pointing exercises 
 coxrtaining transitions of two removes, (b) To vocalize as above, 
 exercises containing easy transitions of one remove in the perfect 
 and imperfiect methods. -v ,; 
 
 SfGHT-SiNGiNG.— (a) To sol-fa at sight a written or printed test 
 of moderate difficulty, including transitions of one remove indicated 
 by bridge-notes, (b) To sol-fa as above a test including modula- 
 tion to the r^ative minor writh the tone se used thus, 1 se 1. 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to laa or time-names, exercises con- 
 t^biiing any divisions of rhythm previously specified with the 
 addition of quarter-pulse silences. 
 
 Ear Exercises. — To write in correct time and tune a phrase of 
 four measures,^ including whole pulse tones and continuations, but 
 no divided pulses, the Examiner singing the DOH chord and indi- ' 
 eating the rate of movement by beating one complete measure 
 prior to singing the test. 
 
 Prepared Song. — To include transition 0/ one remove, and 
 divided pulses, sung to words with a fair command of voice, expres- 
 sion and clear articulation. 
 
 DIVISION VIII. 
 
 Modulator.— (a) To sol-fa from Examiner's pointing exercises 
 containing trat^sitions of two and three removes, and phrases in 
 the minor mode, including the tones ba and se. {b) To sol-fa as 
 above, exercises containing any chromatic tones in stepwise pro- 
 gression, thus : — m re m, 8 la s, r ma r. 
 
 Sight-Singing. — (a) To sol-fa at sight an easy test including 
 transition of one remove indicated by bridge-notes, and modula- 
 tions to the relative minor, including the tones ba and se in stepwise 
 progression, (b) To vocalise at sight an easy test including tran-^r 
 sition of one remove. 
 
 Time. — To sing on one tone to laa or time-names exercises of 
 moderate difficulty, including any divisions of rhythm previously 
 specified, with the addition of simple syncopations. 
 
••., ■■•";'■; ^ • ;■ (,-"',■' ■■'■■, .;',•-■. \ ■ 
 
 ;;_■'•■ — ~ ■ ■ . .,^ '-V'. TRANSITION. ' \ ^l}t ,' ^ ' — ■■ I37 
 
 Ear Exercises.— To write in correct time and tune a phrase of 
 four measures containing half-pulses and the tones fe and ta, the 
 examiner first indicating the rate of movement* and giving the tones 
 of the DOH chord. 
 
 In order that each topic may be more clearly 
 understood, a separate chapter is devoted to the 
 discussion of each individually. The methods of 
 teaching any one topic are identical in all classes./ . 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 TRANSITION. 
 
 In order to clearly understand transition, C'— d' 
 
 it is necessary that the standard scale of R_t 
 
 pitch should first be studied. The Tonic t? # 
 
 Sol-fa notation makes no attempt at express- ^ 1 
 
 ing absolute pitch other than intimating \> t 
 
 the key in which a piece of music is written. G — S 
 
 This is done by means of the first seven ^ ^ 
 
 letters of the alphabet. The scale of C has ^ ~^ ' 
 
 been adopted by musicians as the standard E— •*» 
 
 by which the pitch of all. other scales is ^ t 
 
 governed. By referring to the annexed D~r 
 diagram it will be noticed that the intervals 
 
 of this scale correspond exactly with those ^^^ 
 of the third step modulator. Musicians have not yet 
 
138 r THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 agreed upon any definite standard, but the majority 
 favour 256 vibrations as the standard for Middle C. 
 
 In teaching, it is advisable to use 
 an ordinary modulator (third step) 
 
 PiTCHINQ THE KEY. 
 
 suspended by a cord of sufficient length to permit 
 of its being raised or lowered to ^ny desired position. 
 The seven letters being written on the blackboard on 
 a line with the corresponding notes of the modulator 
 will illustrate the scale of absolute pitch, while the 
 movable modulator will illustrate the scale of relative 
 pitch, with its movable doh. The lesson may be 
 illustrated by referring to the standard of weights 
 and measures, by which all others are measured. In 
 pitching the key the modulator should be moved 
 until d is opposite the letter which represents the 
 required key. Then take the sound of C from the 
 tuning-fork or other instrument, and sing downwards 
 to the letter required, and sing doh on exactly the 
 same pitch. The keys most commonly used may be 
 readily pitched by singing the note which is on the 
 same pitch as C, and then downwards to d, thus : — 
 To pitch G : move the modulator until d is opposite 
 G. Fah will now be opposite C ; sound C, call 
 it fah, and sing f m r d. The d will then indicate 
 the key of G. 
 
 We have hitherto changed key frequently in sing- 
 ing different exercises, but have not as yet changed 
 key within any one exercise or tune. When this takes 
 place it is called Transition. It serves to add increased 
 interest to a musical composition by introducing 
 
V- 
 
 TRANSITION 
 
 ' 139 
 
 FOURTH STEP 
 
 MODULA OR. 
 
 d' .;;„.;;#-. '.. 
 
 t ml 1 
 
 re' se 
 1 - t^ S 
 
 se '»' *^' ba 
 
 s DOH' f 
 
 ba TE m 
 
 f ta ^ 
 
 m LAH . r 
 
 la ,,.•., ■.;.,-.. 
 
 r - SOH " d 
 
 d > FAH: 
 
 t, IVIE 1, 
 
 °^* '• se, 
 
 1, RAY s, 
 
 se, " ** ba. 
 
 s, DOH ,,, fi 
 
 ba, ||[ m, 
 
 I ta, .■:::V:..^::.. . 
 
 n, ^ -^r-^v,:/ r, 
 
 '- se, 
 
 r, • -.ii d, 
 
 ba. '•' *2 
 
 d, f, 
 
 t:, rn, L 
 
 variety and freshness. Tran- 
 sition in some form is used 
 in about ninety per cent, of 
 the tunes in common use. 
 The commonest of all tran- ; 
 sitions is that in which soh 
 of the old key becomes 
 doh of the new key. Soh 
 being technically termed 
 the Dominant of the scale, 
 a transition, in which soh 
 becomes the key-tone, is 
 called a ** Dominant Tran- 
 sition." When in transition 
 fah of the old key becomes 
 doh of the new key, this 
 is called a " Sub-dominant 
 Transition,"asfahis known 
 as the Sub-dominant of the 
 scale. In comparing the 
 tones of the old and new 
 keys in either of the above 
 transitions, it will be ob- 
 served that only one note 
 is altered, viz., in one fah 
 is sharpened to make te, 
 while in the other te is . 
 flattened to make fah. No 
 transition can be made 
 without the displacement 
 
140 ' THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 of at least one tone. When only one tone is thus 
 displaced, we have the form of transition which is 
 most easily sung, the difficulty increasing in proportion 
 to the number of tones which are of necessity dis- 
 placed. Before introducing the subject of transition, 
 it is necessary that the. construction of the scale be 
 clearly understood in order that a proper conception 
 may be formed of the real nature of a " change of key." 
 
 FIRST LESSON ON TRANSITION. 
 
 Write on blackboard an ordinary third step 
 
 "^ modulator with short horizontal lines opposite 
 
 each note. Direct attention to the lines as 
 
 indicating the intervals between the tones of the 
 
 » — scale. Introduce the subject by ear exercises 
 
 f _ in which the expectant, leading effect of tc is 
 
 m— contrasted with the firm, restful effect of doh. 
 
 Teacher. — (Gives key-tone, then sings to laa d r d t,.) Can 
 you tell me the names of those four tones ? 
 d — Class. — d r d t|. 
 
 t' — Teacher. — Quite right. Can jrou describe the effect just 
 
 produced by ending on te ? Listen once more and try. 
 
 (Repeats the phrase.) 
 
 Class.— It is restless. It is unfinished. It expects doh to finish it. 
 
 Teacher. — Now let us compare it with an ending on doh. (Sings 
 
 d r d t^ — d, pausing on t| to intensify its expectant effect.) How 
 
 did that sound ? 
 
 Class. — It seemed mcHre finished. It was restful. 
 Teacher. — Listen again and tell me what tones you hear. (Sings 
 8 I I fe — 8, which is simply the previous phrase repeated a fifth 
 higher.) v v 
 
 C/a«.— It is d» r' d« td'. 8 1 8 f 8. 
 
 Teacher. — A. number seem to think it was the same phrase 
 repeated an octave higher, I will sing it as such. (Sings d' r* d' t d'). 
 Is that the same as before ? 
 Class. — No ; it is too high. 
 
TRANSITION. 
 
 I • 
 
 141 
 
 Teacher. — If the phrase is not an octave higher than the first, we 
 must try to find out what it is. (Repeats 8 1 ■ fe ■.) * 
 
 Class. — It is like the first phrase. It is s 1 s f s. 
 , Teacher. — You do not seem to be able to agree about it yet, still 
 you are both partly correct. Let us take one tone at a time and 
 perhaps we will succeed better. (Sings one tone at a time, 
 eliciting correct answers until fe is reached.) Some say the fourth 
 tone is fah. I will sing fah this time. (Sings • 1 t f s.) Is that 
 the same as before ? 
 
 Class. — No ; it is too gloomy. It is too low. 
 
 Teacher. — What is the interval between soh and fah 7 
 • • Class. — ^A foil tone. 
 ' Teacher. — -And what between d and t, ? 
 . Class. — A semitone. 
 
 Teacher.— V/e find that this fourth tone is below loh, though not 
 quite so low as fah, and you have told me it sounds like te. Let 
 
 us change foh into doh and sing. (Writes K opposite to the right 
 
 and points while class sing d r d.) You can readily recognise that 
 as being the same as I sang before, but where shall we place t| ? 
 Class. — A semitone below «. 
 
 Teacher. — Quite correct. Now sing both phrases from my 
 pointing. (Points d r d t, d "d r d t| d while pupils sing.) Yon 
 will now observe that both phrases are alike, but the latter is in a 
 new key. We will now build the remainder of the new 
 scale. (This is done from pupils' dictation.) You will 
 notice that all the tones are not on the same lines. How 
 many tones are altered ? 
 Class. — Fah is the only one. 
 
 Teacher. — Yes. We find in this change of key only 
 one tone which requires to be displaced, all the others 
 remaining on precisely the same pitch as the tones of the 
 old key. Te being the new tone introduced by the tran- 
 sition is termed the distinguishing tone. In making the 
 transition we crossed over on soh, bnt we might have 
 done so on any other tone but fah. The tone on which 
 
 we cross from «iny one key to another 
 is termed the bridge-tone. We will 
 now pfiactise changing key on various 
 
 d'-f 
 t 
 
 m 
 
 1 — r 
 s — d 
 
 a — 1| 
 
 T • 
 
 d-f, 
 t,— «l| 
 
 l.-r, 
 
 Briooe-Tones. 
 
142 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 bridge-tones, and I would ask you to make sure that you sing the 
 bridge-tone and the tone opposite, without altering the sound. 
 (Practise as indicated.) ' ' 
 
 I will now show you how transition is indi- 
 cated by the notation. We use a small note 
 for the bridge-note, thus : sd, but you must not 
 
 Notation of 
 Transition. 
 
 measure its importance by its size, as it is really the most important 
 note in the transition. 
 
 Key C. ■:■■'•■■■.■':■ ■-' '"• '■■'•■■ 
 
 Writes: dmrdt|d>dmrdt|d 
 
 In singing this you must be as careful of the bridge-tone as when 
 singing from the modulator. (This is practised, a pause being 
 made on the bridge-tone to catch the correct sound of the new key.) 
 , When the key is changed for a few pulses only, it is not consid- 
 ered necessary to alter the tones or use a bridge-note, but simply 
 to substitute a new tone for fah on the same pitch as te of the new 
 
 key. This new tone is called fe. (Writes fe 
 
 between 8 and f on the modulator and practises.) 
 
 The method of denoting transition by bridge- 
 
 The Imperfect 
 Method. 
 
 notes is termed the perfect method, and that which substitutes fe 
 for fah the imperfect method. 
 
 Exercises in translating from the perfect to the 
 imperfect method, and vice versa^ should now be 
 frequently employed The teacher points to the 
 modulator and sings d ti d, S|. Pupils imitate in the 
 imperfect method by singing s fe S r. ♦ * 
 
 S -r^ Transition to the first flat key may be 
 — t taught by the same process as above. In 
 *, * , this, fah becomes doh, and te of the 
 original key is displaced by fah of the new 
 key. In the imperfect method the new 
 d — f tone is named ta (pronounced taw). It 
 t — ni should also be noticed that when a transition 
 li — y is made to a sharp key, i.e. where the dis- 
 J tinguishing tone is formed by sharpening 
 
 n-1 
 r — 8 
 
■%>^-. ' 
 
 TRANSITION. j^x 
 
 the corresponding tone of the original key, as f 
 becoming fe, the mental effect of the tune is bright- 
 ened and intensified. This may be accounted for 
 by the fact that soh, the tone of brightness, becomes 
 the foundation tone of the new key, and so adds 
 color to all the others; When the transition is made 
 by flattening te of the original key, the opposite 
 effect is produced, and the tune becomes depressed 
 and gloomy through the influence of fah, which 
 becomes the foundation tone of the new key. 
 
 Exercises for modulator and black-board practice : 
 
 Stepwise progression, s fe S. 
 
 Imperfect Method. 
 Keys C to E. 
 
 dndrssfesmfrdtid 
 ndfrsfeslsd'mrrd 
 drfmsfesnsfesfrd 
 slinflsfesmrftird 
 d m r f m 8 fe s d m f r t| d . 
 .s m 1 s fe s 1 f r s d r t, d 
 
 Stepwise progression, 1 ta 1, d' ta 1. 
 
 ' d s m f 1 d' ta 1 s f 1 s t d' ■ ^ 
 d' t d' 1 m f 1 s 1 ta 1 s t d' , 
 d f ir s d' ta 1 s t d' m f r d 
 m r s f 1 s 1 ta 1 d' t 1 s d' 
 d' t 1 s d' ta 1 s d' s t 1 t d' 
 ^Jwrfmsfltalsd'td' 
 
144 
 
 THK TKACHER S HANDHOoK. 
 
 Fe and ta approached by leap : — 
 ; Keys E to G . 
 
 m d m r s 1 f e B m f r 8 1 f r d 
 8 m d r f e s 1 f r s f e 8 m f f m 
 
 dtidsmlfesmfesfmrsd 
 d Si r t| d m r fe 8 d f r d 1| t| d 
 d r ti d 8 1 fc 8 m d fe 8 1 r r d 
 r«ir8fe8rdt|fe8dm8frd 
 
 Keys C to E. 
 
 dfnrsd'talstaldsffm 
 nrfm8tal8d'fnr8ft|d 
 d' t d< 8 1 ta ta 1 8 f ta 1 8 d' t d< 
 d f m r 8 d' ta 1 8 d' m f ta 1 t d' 
 
 PERFECT METHOD. 
 In denoting transition by the perfect method, the 
 name of the new key, with its distin^juishing tone, is 
 always written immediately above the bridge-note. 
 '\ ♦ Transition TO First Sharp Key. ' "^ 
 
 KeyC. 
 
 G.t. 
 
 f.C. 
 
 dmrd8l8»dmrddt|ddsmfrdtid 
 
 KeyD. 
 
 A.t. 
 
 f.D. 
 
 dt|dmrr8irdt|dl|8|dd8lfmfrd 
 
 KeyG. • D.t. f.G, / / 
 
 d Si 1| ti d m r '8 d t| d m r 8 "r m f m r 8 d 
 
 KeyBI?. r F.t. - f.Bt>. ' V 
 
 d S| m, si 1| f| 8| m.l, 8| d r ti 1| S| «.ri S( f| n, 1, t| d 
 
 KEYAb. Eb.t. f. Ab. 
 
 dt|d8|dmrr8mfrt|dsimmfrdt|d 
 
 KeyF. C.t. f.F. 
 
 m d 8 n r f m ir' d' t d' 1 t d' d's n 1 f n r d 
 
; TRANSITION. 145 
 
 Transxtion to First FLAxiUy. 
 Key a. f.D. A.t. 
 
 dnrdfrmmtd'lfrrs 'dtid S| 1| ti d 
 
 KbyC. f.F. C.t. 
 
 8 m 1 B f f m <d m B f n f m rg m f b t t d' 
 
 Key F. f.Bt? F.t. 
 
 d ti d s 1 f B im f n r b f n mi b f r b t| d 
 
 KeyG. f.C. G.t. 
 
 n s r f ti r d '1 b d' m f f m 'Bi d ti r f ti d 
 
 During the earlier lessons in transition it is necesary 
 .to make a slight pause at the bridge-tone until the 
 eftect of the tones of the new key can be anticipated. 
 The simplicity of the Tonic Sol-fa notation of transi- 
 tion is somewhat misleading. It may be imagined 
 that when the names of the tones in the new key 
 are so clearly indicated there can be no difficulty 
 
 EKSEorDiFncuLTYl experienced in singing them correctly, 
 IK Tbamsition. bi/t in practice this is fotrnd to be far 
 
 from the case. However simple the notation may 
 
 be, the fact still remains that it is with the thing 
 
 . itself that the difficulty lies, and this cannot be 
 
 . overcome without the exercise of. a definite mental 
 
 'exertion. Whenever the key is changed the mental 
 
 . effect of every tone of the scale is also changed^and 
 
 .during the first few pulses of the transition it is 
 
 somewhat uncertain, as. each scale is struggling. for 
 
 supremacy, the old being, already established In the 
 
 mind, and the new endeavoring to displace it • and 
 
 become supreme. The following will serve, to iilus- 
 
I 
 
 - M 
 
 146 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 trate what takes place in the simplest of all transitions, 
 viz., from Tonic to Dominant — or to the first sharp 
 key :— . 
 
 Firm d' 
 
 becomes 
 
 Gloomy f 
 
 Piercing t 
 
 ' w 
 
 Calm n. 
 
 Plaintive 1 
 
 <( 
 
 Rousing r- 
 
 Bright s 
 
 i( 
 
 Firm d- 
 
 Gloomy f is 
 
 supplanted by Piercing t|- 
 
 Calm m 
 
 becomes 
 
 Plaintive 1,. 
 
 Rousing r 
 
 M 
 
 Bright S|- 
 
 ii care is necessary in singing transitions of one 
 remove only, greater care is required when more 
 remote transitions are being dealt with. When two 
 tones of the original key are displaced, the transition 
 is termed a transition of two removes ; when three 
 tones are displaced, three removes, and so on, the 
 
 number of removes being indicated 
 by the number of tones which are 
 
 Removes. 
 
 displaced. The difficulty of singing the transition 
 increases in proportion to the number of removes by 
 which the transition is made. A common error is to 
 suppose that a transition of one remove necessarily 
 implies that the transition is made from C to G. On 
 the contrary, transitions are calculated from any key, 
 thus,- -from D to A would be one sharp remove, 
 from D to E two sharp removes, and from D to B 
 three sharp r amoves, and vice versa^ as from B to D 
 would be three yf^/ removes. When the distinguish- 
 ing tone is formed by sharpening — i.e. raising — the 
 
-(,.; 
 
 TRANSITION. I47 
 
 corresponding tone of the original key, the transition 
 is said to be to a sharp key, and when by flattening 
 — i.e lowering — it is said to be to a flat key. In the 
 Extended Modulator the sharp keys are placed to the 
 right, and the flat keys to the left. For convenience 
 of reference the key signatures of the staff notation 
 with the scale of absolute pitch are added. 
 
 In teaching it is not advisable to display the com- 
 plete modulator until each individual transition has 
 been studied. A much clearer idea of the facts of a 
 new transition can be conveyed by building up, from 
 pupils' dictation, the new scale side by side with the 
 old. By this method pupils are enabled to investigate 
 for themselves, and the distinguishing tones of the 
 new key with the corresponding number of altered 
 tones are readily discovered. When this has been 
 done the connection between the modulator and the 
 notation may be demonstrated by the teacher pointing 
 short phrases on the modulator, and requiring the 
 pupils to write them on the blackboard, using bridge- 
 notes at the proper places. The following will serve 
 for this purpose : — 
 
 i 
 
 f , 
 
 m 
 
 ,.:A 
 
 -^ll 
 
 ti 
 
 d 
 
 • 
 
 1>: 
 
 1 
 
 '■'» 
 
 •d 
 
 ti 
 
 d 
 
 4 
 
 ■m • 
 
 :'.t 
 
 f 
 
 d's 
 
 
 m 
 
 • -• 
 
 w- 
 
 '%■■■ 
 
 's, 
 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 ■ 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 ■r 
 
 
 w 
 
 The process may be reversed with advantage, the 
 teacher writing the exercises on .he board and requir- 
 ing the pupils to point them on the modulator. 
 
iS 
 
 THE EXTENDED MODULATOR. 
 
 BoH^b A!?.Eb Bt? F 
 
 G D A E B 
 
 i-.- 
 
 ^m F 
 
 G Q D 
 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 ■i? 
 
 ^ .M 
 
 • <?»•«« 
 
 m' 1 
 
 Be 
 
 r' '-8 d' 
 
 ba t 
 
 Fl 
 El 
 
 
 El 
 
 1 
 
 '<ae 
 
 t' «B 
 
 'd' f 
 
 ,r' s 
 
 d' f 
 
 I? 
 
 
 t 
 
 se 
 
 ba 
 
 t rm 
 
 .J»a 
 
 t ml 
 
 Di 
 
 r' 
 
 DI 
 
 B 
 
 d' f 
 
 
 c:' f 
 
 '■■".,•'.■ .^.«e 
 
 1> 
 
 ■ '-;■ ..' ■■ 
 
 '«• 
 
 ba 
 
 i.t ^ri 
 
 1 ' 
 
 't m 
 
 \ T *^B 
 
 C 
 
 DOH' 
 
 CI 
 
 rf 
 
 
 ■e 
 
 
 •• ba 
 
 B 
 
 TE 
 
 B 
 
 m 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 B d 
 
 1 ' 
 
 86 
 
 .B d f 
 
 ba 't| ^m 
 
 ^A 
 
 ta 
 
 •le 
 
 LAH 
 
 A 
 
 kT 
 
 > 
 86 
 
 B .d 
 
 ba t| 
 f 
 
 B A 
 
 f 
 
 •I? 
 
 la 
 
 «e 
 
 j( 
 
 
 ba *t| 
 
 'nn *1| 
 
 ba t| 
 
 "Tl 1, '^ 
 
 861 
 
 G 
 
 SOH 
 
 fe 
 ba 
 
 G 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 "Tl 1| 
 
 Be, 
 
 >r .B| 
 
 m 1| 
 
 r Bi d 
 
 ibai t| 
 
 F 
 E 
 
 FAH 
 ME 
 
 F 
 E 
 
 ll 
 
 *M| 
 
 r 'Bi 
 
 .ba, 
 
 d f, 
 
 r B| 
 
 ba, 
 
 d f, 
 
 I? 
 T> 
 
 ma 
 
 ve 
 
 RAY 
 
 D 
 
 'B| 
 
 ' ba, 
 
 d ifi 
 
 ti mi 
 
 d f , 
 
 Be, 
 
 1? 
 
 de 
 
 t 
 
 ba, 
 
 ti pii 
 
 I, " 
 
 iti W| 
 
 .1, '' "• 
 
 i<«ei >tet 
 
 C 
 
 Jb 
 
 DX)H 
 
 C 
 B, 
 
 •fl 
 
 f1| 
 
 .1 " 
 
 •Bei 
 
 Bi di 
 
TH»' MINOR MODE. T ^ 149 
 
 Exercise f6r>TTToduktor and blackboaxad practice : 
 
 • ' Two Sharp RtnovBS^ 
 Kby C. D.t.m. d.f.C. 
 
 d; m-r d f^N r'd'tfd^m'firf as 4is f>i f r d 
 
 Kkv G. A.t.m. f.d.O. 
 
 dA ti d s ' 1 f B' "f PTTf f r- di r t,. *r m fi r d U^M 
 ds s^ 1,1 rrtrr Bv^'S^l^tld'^ f n r 'n,ri f, IrSitjd.^. 
 
 Key F. G.t.m. d.£.F. 
 
 dl mf r sfld;f mir,4itj. din rr s. ^t 1 s. r f ti.d.> 
 
 - Two FLat Removbs. .' ; • ./ ::'^- 
 
 KtYC. d.f.Bt>- C.t.iii., 
 
 Bin l.rrf m Lit, d.B*;ni, f, i^ r^ »rr n f r. d t| d; 
 
 KkyA.. d.f.G:; , i Ait-m.; "^ ^ 
 
 ditpdiSi Ijifi d.dr n fi r tr r, S| "if^ n| rrsf tr rr d< 
 
 Key El? d.f.Dl?. EtJ.t.m.. 
 
 d n f 1 r t, d^'^n r f n d r t| % Ud n r s d 
 
 • : ■ i ■ 
 
 CHAPTER. XV 1 1: 
 
 •"'■ .■ i^ ■•»y 
 
 ft 
 
 In the forgoing chapters Mve- have used oirLy one 
 mode of treatmg the tones of the scate, viz., that in 
 which dohris recognized as the fundslmental or ke>r 
 tone, btit now othbr modes fail t<!> be studied and j 
 explained. Thb ear- ?s never satisfied with • a tune 
 in which it cannot find some prominent ton© upon: 
 which to re.t as on a centre of gravity. DOH is the 
 
150 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 tone most commonly used in this respect, but it is 
 possible to treat any other tone in a similar manner, 
 
 and some of the Ancient Modes have 
 actually done so with a very pleasing 
 
 Anoient Modes. 
 
 effect However, with the exception of the Lah 
 Mode all others have fallen into disuse, this being 
 considered best adapted to modern ideas of harmony. 
 Modes are termed Major or Minor according to the 
 nature of the chord upon which they are built ; thus 
 the DOH chord being Major, />. having a Major third 
 from the root, with a Minor third above, is termed 
 a Major chord, while the Lah chord having a Minor 
 third from the root with a Major chord above, is 
 
 termed a Minor chord. Practically, 
 then, we have now only two modes 
 
 Foundation Chords. 
 
 in general use, viz. : — '^ ' ' • ., 
 
 The Major, or Doh Mode, and x 
 The Minor, or Lah Mode. 
 
 In teaching the Minor mode, the first matter of 
 importance is to impress the effect of the Lah chord 
 by practising the tones 1 d i^ only. If this is dwelt 
 upon sufficiently it will soon be felt that the mental 
 
 effect of the tones is strongly in- 
 fluenced by the effect of lah. The 
 
 Alteration of 
 Mental Effeot. 
 
 sad effect of lah will be intensified, and a restful 
 feeling will also be experienced when ending on lah ; 
 doh will lose its strong, reposeful effect, and will be 
 almost as sad as lah ; no will gain in breadth and 
 grandeur without losing its former plaintiveness. The 
 Minor mode is never so easily sung as the Major, 
 
V 
 
 , THE MINOR MODE. I5I 
 
 even by the best singers ; still, practice will soon estab- 
 lish the new mental effects, and the Minor mode will 
 become comparatively easy. 
 
 Introductory Phrases in thb Minor Mode. 
 
 li d m 1 1, m d 1| 1 m d 1| 
 
 li d 1| m 1| d m d 1| 1| d 1| m d 1| 
 
 Indl 1, mndml, Idmdml, 
 
 When the effect of the Minor mode has been 
 established by the use of the above exercise, the 
 construction of the Minor scale may be studied. The 
 Ancient or Historical form, so called because of its 
 
 employment in old national melodies, 
 consists of the tones of the scale 
 
 The Angient 
 Minor. 
 
 arranged in precisely the same order as in the Major. 
 Many fine specimens of this form still exist one of 
 the best known being the old Scottish air, "John 
 Anderson, my Jo." Modem harmony, however, re- 
 quires that the Tonic of any mode should be supplied 
 with a leading note, ?>., a note placed a semitone 
 
 below the Tonic to which it leads, as J This is 
 
 t|. 
 
 formed by displacing s and substituting se> which is 
 written a semitone below 1. This is termed the 
 
 Harmonic Minor, because of its adapt- 
 ability to the requirements of har- 
 
 The Harmonic 
 Minor. 
 
 mony. In singing, it will be felt that there is an 
 awkward gap between f and 86, being a semitone 
 greater than any other interval of the scale. In order 
 to obviate this difficulty another new tone, named ba» 
 
15^: THE teacher's HANDBOOK. , 
 
 (pronounced bay\ is introduced between f- and s/ 
 
 This is termed the Melodic Minor on 
 account of the more pleasing melody 
 
 Titt Mftoote 
 Minor. 
 
 formed by the introduction of ba. 
 
 r Minor. 
 
 Harmonic Minor. 
 
 Melodic Minor. 
 
 i 
 
 . .1 - 
 
 1 
 
 ■ ' ' , ' \ 
 
 86. ' ' ' ' 
 
 se^ 
 
 
 f 
 
 ba 
 
 m 
 
 . » 
 
 n 
 
 w ■ 
 
 ■ r^ 
 
 r ■ 
 
 *.• " 
 
 *.■. 
 
 ■ C: . . 
 
 % 
 
 t, 
 
 ' t, ' 
 
 ■ r- ^ ii ir 
 
 Musical theorists have drawn some fine technical 
 distinctions between the manner in which the various 
 modes are to be sung ascending and descending, but 
 their opinions differ so widely that they would only 
 tend to confuse the inexperienced teacher. The 
 point to be kept in view is not how to sing the whole 
 scale stepwise, but how to sing the tones in rtw;' order.* 
 It wiH be observed that the difference between the 
 various, modes lies between the sixth and seventh 
 tones only; They may be briefly described as follows : 
 
 Sevenths I ^ Essential to the Modem Minor. 
 ( Sok. Seldont used. 
 
 Sixths I!*, Occasional. 
 ( Fah Essential. 
 
THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 »53 
 
 In teaching, it is advisable to build up the Ancient 
 Minor side by side with the Major on the board, 
 showing the fundamental point of difference to be in 
 the interval of a third from the Root, then show the 
 necessity for a leading tone (se) and finally for the 
 
 sharp sixth (ba). 
 
 In the Melodic Minor the intervals 
 
 ^ between the four upper tones correspond 
 
 g exactly with the Major, the third being 
 1 — ba the only interval in which there is any 
 ^ essential difference. 
 
 In all exercises in the Minor mode, the 
 tones 1 and d should be frequently intro- 
 duced, and the Minor chord 1| d n should 
 be given as the key chord before commenc- 
 ing. As doh is the key-tone of the Major, 
 so lah is the key-tone of the Minor. To 
 prevent confusion in octave marks and the 
 relation of tones in absolute pitch, 
 the name of the Major key is retained 
 
 8 — n 
 
 f-r 
 m 
 
 r-t, 
 d-1, 
 
 Minor 
 Key-Signature. 
 
 and the pitch of lah indicated in addition, thus, — 
 Key C, Lah is A ; Key G, Lah is E. .. 
 
 Major mode exercises : 
 
 For Modulator and Blackboard Practicb. 
 Kby F. Lah is D. 
 
 li d ti d 1| d m r m d t| r d t| 1| 
 - m d 1 1 f r m d 1, d ti m d ti 1| 
 : d. m 1, d t| r d m 1, t| d r m n 1, 
 
 lidmllmfmlfmrtimli 
 
V 
 
 154 . THE 
 
 ■ ■ < , » ■ 
 
 teacher's handbook. 
 
 .• 
 
 
 
 
 Key D. Lah is B. 
 
 1 n d r ti 
 
 m 1, t d m 1 
 
 1 
 
 d' 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 n d 1 PI f. 
 
 1 r t d' 1 f 
 
 r 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 d m 1 m 1 
 
 t 1 d' 1 t m 
 
 r 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 1 
 
 1 f n r 1 
 
 t m 1 d' m 1 
 
 d' 
 
 r' 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 With Essential Seventh (se) in stepwise progression. 
 Key C. Lah is A. 
 
 1 d' t 1 n 1 se 1 t d' r' t 1 se 1 
 d'tld'lselnrnfnlsel 
 m 1 se 1 d' t r' t 1 t n d' 1 se 1 
 d n 1 t 1 se 1 1 d' 1 f r 1 se 1 
 
 m 1 se 1 
 
 m 1, sei 1| 
 
 Key E. Lah is CJ. 
 
 1, d m d 1| sei 1| d m 1 t 
 
 mdfmlselnfrti 
 
 d ti li d t, li sei 1, d n 1, d li sei 1 
 
 lmldnlselfrmdliseili 
 
 With se approached by leap. ,' i;^ 
 Key G. Lah is E. 
 
 d 1| sei li d t| sei 1| ti d m r d t| 1| 
 
 li d li PI 1 se 1 PI »^ se 1 d r ti li 
 
 li d ti sei 1| d n r d sei 1; r m sei 1| 
 
 m f m 1 se 1 f m se 1 PI d ti sei li 
 
 Key a. Lah is Fjf. 
 
 d ti li d ti 1| sei 1| d r ti sei 1 sei 1| 
 
 PI d r ti d 1| ti sei l fi ^\ T\ m, sei 1| 
 
 )i d li n d ti li sei 1| p1| sei 1| d t 1| 
 
 li Pi| li d t| n li sei li d ti sei li d 1| 
 
CHROMATIC TONES. I55 
 
 With ba and 86 in stepwise progression. 
 Key D. Lah is B. 
 
 1 86 1 m ba se I t d' m 1 86 1 t 1 
 
 m 1 86 1 d' t 1 86 ba 86 1 t m 86 1 
 
 m m ba 86 1 t di 1 86 86 ba 86 1 ml 
 
 1 86 ba m ba 86 1 t d' 1 m d' t 86 1 
 
 Fah is frequently required in the Minor mode. 
 Like the other tones it is influenced by the effect of 
 the Minor and becomes more solemn than in the 
 Major. It should be frequently contrasted with ba 
 in order to establish its mental effect. , -. 
 
 Exercises with fah and ba contrasted : 
 Key D. Lah is B. ' ' 
 
 1 n d 1| f — r*i 1 m ba 86 86 t 1 
 1 d' t 1 86 bam Id' 1 f m r m 1, 
 d' 1 t m ba 86 1 t d' m f r d t, 1| 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 CHEOMiiTIC TONES. 
 
 - The scale, composed of the unaltered tones d r m f 
 8 1 1 d' is termed the Diatonic scale. The term Chro- 
 matic is broadly applied to all tones which lie between 
 the tones of the diatonic scale. Chromatics are 
 named from the notes immediately above or below 
 in the diatonic scale for which they are substituted, 
 thus, — f f6 ; 8 86 ; r ra ; d d6. Sharp chromatics 
 are indicated by the vowel e, as d6 16 fe 86 l6 ; and 
 
156 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 flat chromatics by the vowel a (pronounced aw\ as 
 ra na la ta. All chromatics suggest a change of 
 key, and as a rule have their model in the distinguish- 
 ing tones of the key suggested. By comparing ther' 
 tones in the various columns of the Extended Modu-» 
 lator it will thus be seen that fe is t of the first sharp 
 
 remove ; ta is f of first flat remove ; 
 
 re is Be of the first sharp remove; 
 
 Model of 
 
 GlWOMATIOS. 
 
 ma- is f of the second flat remove, etc.; the sharp 
 chromatics being related to te of some s/tarp remove; 
 and the flat chromatics to fah of some^at removei 
 A knowledge of these facts will aid materially in • 
 teaching chromatics. The time at the disposal of the 
 ordinary school teacher will not admit of a thorough? 
 investigation of this somewhat complicated subject,' 
 and, unless in cases where the teacher has Lad special . 
 advantages in musical training, it is not advisable to 
 attempt to teach difficult chromatic intervals.^ The- 
 simplest form of approaching and quitting chromatics 
 is by stepwise progression, as s fe S, m re in, r Pia 
 r, 1 ta 1. Se being an essential of the Diatonic 
 Minor scale is not considered as being chromatic. 
 All chromatics follow the leading tendency. of the 
 tones upon which they are modelled^ 
 thus sharp chromatics have an up- 
 
 Uainno Tenknov 
 of chromatio8. 
 
 ward inclination like te, and flat chromatics a down- 
 ward inclination like fah. 
 
 In teaching,, the chromatics should be compared 
 with feh.or te> as the case may be, and their resem- 
 blance noted. One chromatic only should be studied 
 at a time, and its effect established by frequent 
 
CHROMATIC ICJNES. 
 
 157 
 
 repetition. The following method may be applied in 
 teaching all chromatic tones : 
 
 THE TEACHER SINGS 
 
 r f d' 
 f 
 m 
 f 
 
 f 
 
 '^ > PI 
 
 '8 I 
 
 d' 
 
 THE PUPILS RESPOND : 
 
 n 
 
 «d 
 
 n 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 n 
 d 
 
 n 
 d 
 m 
 
 r 
 m 
 
 8 1 f r 
 
 1 
 f 
 
 8 
 PI 
 
 r 
 d 
 
 ta :-|l 
 
 By the above means the attention is concentrated 
 
 * on tal, and pupils become familiar with its effect as 
 
 aapproadhed from any tone of the scale. This should 
 
 "be followed by the pupils singing the above or similar 
 
 r^exercises, ta 1 being introduced at the close of each. 
 
 The sharp chromatics are most easily sung when 
 
 approached . from the tone above, as m re l*i,(t le t, 
 
 r<de T ; and the flat chromatics from the tone below, 
 
 as 1 ta 1, 8 la 8» r ma r. 
 
 Exercises in Chromatic tones : — 
 Key D. 
 
 d 
 
 n 8 ' n r f m r 
 
 ma 
 
 r 
 
 ^ li 
 
 t, d 
 
 8 
 
 f m d r ma r 8 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 d r 
 
 ra d 
 
 m 
 
 1 se'l m re m d 
 
 r 
 
 de 
 
 r 8 
 
 t| d 
 
 d' 
 
 t vd' tal t di 1 
 
 8e 
 
 1 
 
 f r 
 
 m d 
 
 d 
 
 m 1 8e 1 t let 
 
 d< 
 
 8 
 
 fef 
 
 r d 
 
 d 
 
 r f m 8 I518 f 
 
 m 
 
 1 
 
 la .8 
 
 f m 
 
 m 
 
 re m f r de r s 
 
 1 
 
 se 
 
 1 le 
 
 ted' 
 
158 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 ."» ( 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 TIME. ' ' 
 
 If the methods of teaching Time, described in Part 
 I., have been carefully studied, there should not be 
 any serious difficulty encountered in teaching the 
 more intricate divisions of rhythm prescribed for 
 senior divisions. 
 
 The division of the pulse into three- 
 quarters and quarter may be intro- 
 
 Taa fe. 
 
 duced by the method described on page 86. The 
 notation of this rhythm is | ., : ,, || the comma 
 remaining as in the last quarter of ta fa te fe^ and 
 the dot being moved almost close to it (See page 
 47.) In singing it is frequently confused with taa tat. 
 This may be avoided by comparing one with the 
 other, and showing how fe leads up to the pulse which 
 follows, as: — 
 
 |d.r :m.f |n.r :d Id .,r:m .,f|n .,r:d 11 
 
 ITaataiTaatai Taatai Taa |Taa fe Taa fe Taa fe Taa. 1) 
 Exercises for Taafe\ — - v } 
 
 a. Id :r .,r|m :r „r| d :t|.ti|d :— M 
 
 b. Id .,d*.r |m.n :r Id.d :ti .,ti|d :- 
 
 c. Id :r.r |m .,m:r.,r|d :t|.ti |d 
 
 d. Id :r Mr|m :r Mr|d.4 'tLti |d 
 
 e. |d .,d* |n .m :r .,r|d :ti .,tild 
 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 II 
 
TIME. I eg 
 
 It may be pointed out that the effect of this rhythm 
 is bright and bold, and is frequently employed in 
 martial music. 
 
 The division of the pulse into thirds 
 has a smooth, pleasing effect, which 
 
 Taa Tai Tee. 
 
 contrasts pleasantly with the sharp piquant effect of 
 the previous rhythm. In teaching, it may be illus- 
 trated by short phrases, with the accent on the third 
 syllable, as : — 
 
 i i * t i \ i ( • 
 
 Merri-ly o - ver the| lakelet we glide. 
 
 II 
 
 Exercises for 7>?^ /d!/ /^^. 
 a. 
 
 d :r,r,r|i»! i :r,r^r|d :t|,tut||d 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 I d4«d :r | m,m,m :r Id AA :tutut, | d 
 
 |d :r,r> |n,n,n:r Id :tuti,ti|d 
 
 a. 
 I d Ad :r «r,r | m :r Id ,d4 :tuti<t | d 
 
 II 
 
 With Taa-ai tee. 
 a. 
 
 I d 4 4 :m,-,in | s r«s :d' |d'4'4i :s r«s | m,-,m :d 11 
 
 d-,d:" |B,-«s:d' |d'r,d':s |n,-,n:d 
 
 d<- <d :Pi,r»i,n | b^s :d' Id'r 4' :s<8<b | m^-^m :d 11 
 
 d. 
 
 d<- <d :m,-,n | s <-<s :d' Id',- 4' :& ^-^s | m,-,n :d 11 
 
l6o THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 ^ With -aa tat Ue. 
 
 U :- ,r ,m I r :-,m,f Is :- ,1 ,t I d' :- || 
 Id :-.r,n|r :-,f^S\» -.Int |d' :— 
 
 c. 
 
 d :r |-,m,f:B 11 :s |-Ait:d 
 
 I d :- ,tud I r i-Ajc I m :- ,f ,s 1 1 ,- «t :d' 
 
 Quarter-pulse Rests are seldom used in vocal music, 
 but they are valuable as a means of cultivating exact- 
 ness in singing intricate divisions of rhythm. They 
 may occur at any part of a pulse. 
 
 Example: — ^ 
 
 On 1st quarter, sa fa te fe : — 
 Id : ,r.n,f|s : .f,m,r|d : 4.t,d|r.ti :d 11 
 
 On 2nd quarter, ta sa te fe : — 
 Id :r, .m,f|s :f, .n,r|d :d, .Mlr.t, :d || 
 
 On 3rd quarter, ta fa j^ fe : — 
 Id :r,m. ,f |s :fA ,r|d :d,ti. ,dlr.t, :d It 
 
 On 4th quarter, ta fa te se : — 
 
 d .:r,m,f, |s :f,m.r, Id :d,t|.d, tr .t, :d 11 
 
 In studying the more advanced rhythms, the com- 
 mon divisions of the pulse should not be neglected 
 
^•,> 
 
 TIME. 
 
 idl 
 
 
 but should be frequently reviewed and combined 
 with the others in suitable exercises. The Elementary 
 Rhythms, contained in Book II., and Intermediate 
 Rhythms, in Book III. of the "Canadian Music 
 Course," afford an excellent series of exercises for 
 this purpose. ' ' 
 
 Syncopation is the term applied to rhythm in 
 which the regularity of the accent is interrupted or 
 disturbed, as : — 
 
 d :-.r |-.m :-.d || 
 
 Taa -aa tai -aa tai -aa tai. M 
 
 The time-name for syncopations is formed in the 
 same manner as for ordinary continuations, viz., by 
 dropping the consonant and retaining the vowel of 
 the time-name that would be used for a note struck 
 on the same part of the pulse, thus : — 
 
 d :d .r [r .m :m .r Ir .d :d .ti | d :— 
 
 |Taa Taa tai Taa tai Taa taiJTaa tai Taa tai Taa aa 
 
 Becomes : — 
 d :- .r I - .m :- .r I— .d :d .ti | d :— 
 
 Taa aa tai aa tai aa tai I aa tai Taa tai Taa aa 
 
 a. Id 
 
 ^. Id 
 
 c. id 
 
 d. Id 
 
 EXERCISES IN SYNCOPATION. 
 
 :- .r i-.m :f Is :~ .m |-.r :d 
 
 :- .t| |-.d :- .r Id :r .ti |d :— 
 :- .n I -.8 :d' Id' :- s |-.m ;d 
 :- jr |-.p» :- j: Id :- .n |-.r :d 
 
 U 
 
 II 
 
l62 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 (^ < !-' j,«' t 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 EAB EXEKCI8E8 FOB SENIOR DIVISIONS. 
 
 In introducing Ear Exercises at the commencement 
 of a new session, the work of the previous session 
 
 should be carefully reviewed, in order 
 that the teacher may be enabled to 
 
 Reviewinq 
 Ear Exercises. 
 
 gain a correct estimate of the individual ability of the 
 various pupils. This can easily be accomplished by 
 means of written exercises. Let each pupil Lo sup- 
 plied with slips of paper on which to write the names 
 of the tones of at least three exercises, similar to 
 those used in the previous division. If each pupil's 
 name or number be signed to the slips when returned 
 the teacher will be enabled to form a correct estimate 
 of the degree of difficulty which may be safely intro- 
 duced into the succeeding exercises. The difference 
 between tones approached by leap and those ap- 
 Droached by step should be carefully studied and 
 
 contrasted. Phrases of three tones 
 in stepwise succession, followed by a 
 
 Leaps in 
 Ear Exercises. 
 
 leap, should be given for this purpose. The pupils 
 should be told to give most attention to the last tone. 
 
 sltr' fmrs mfsd'lsfr 
 
 n r d f 
 8 1 B m 
 m f m 1 
 
 f 
 
 n r B 
 
 r 
 
 n f 1 
 
 f 
 
 m f 1 
 
 d 
 
 r df 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 B d' 
 
 B 
 
 f 
 
 m d 
 
 r 
 
 PI 
 
 r 8 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 s d' 
 
 B 
 
 d't 1 f 
 d't d'f 
 
 n r n d 
 
 An interesting exercise may be given by the teacher 
 intimating that the tones of the scale will be sung 
 
EAR KXEKCIS£S FOR SENIOR DIVISIONS. 
 
 163 
 
 upwards or downwards, but that one will be omitted. 
 The pupils will listen with interest for the point where 
 the leap is made. ' *. ? 
 
 Example: — * ' 
 d r n f 1 t d', or d' t 1 B m r d 
 
 If any exercise should be found too difficult, it 
 should be analyzed tone by tone. The name of the 
 first tone being discovered, the teacher will add the 
 
 second, then the third and fourth. 
 Pupils will thus feel that they have 
 mastered the exercise, instead of feeling discouraged 
 by having the answer told by the teacher. 
 
 EXERCISES OF FIVE TONES. 
 
 Analysis of 
 OiFFiouLT Exercises. 
 
 d 
 
 r 
 
 m 
 
 r B 
 
 m 
 
 f 
 
 B 
 
 1 r 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 
 B n 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 B m 
 
 f 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 f n 
 
 r 
 
 n 
 
 d 
 
 r m 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d'l 
 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 d> 
 
 1 f 
 
 B 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 
 f m 
 
 d 
 
 t, 
 
 li 
 
 d B| 
 
 n 
 
 f 
 
 r 
 
 r d 
 
 r 
 
 m 
 
 f 
 
 r d 
 
 The tones fe and ta should be introduced frequently 
 after the lessons on transition have been given, each 
 being treated separately. Exercises in elling on 
 which number fe or ta is sung are best adapted for 
 the first lessons. The key must be clearly defined 
 by first sol-faing the tones of the Don chord. 
 
 Which is fe ? 
 
 I 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 n 
 
 3 
 s 
 
 4 
 fe 
 
 5 
 
 8 
 
 I 
 f 
 
 2 
 m 
 
 3 
 
 r 
 
 4 
 fe 
 
 5 
 B 
 
 8 
 
 fe 
 
 B 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 
 s 
 
 d> 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 fc 
 
 d 
 
 m 
 
 fe 
 
 B 
 
 d 
 
 f 
 
 B 
 
 1 
 
 fe 
 
 B 
 
i64 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 Which is ta ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 -, ■ 
 
 • 
 
 I 2 3 
 
 d m s 
 
 4 
 
 ta 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 d' 
 
 2 
 t 
 
 3 
 
 d' 
 
 4 
 
 ta 
 
 f 
 
 s 1 ta 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 B 
 
 ta 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 d< 
 
 f n d' 
 
 ta 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 
 f 
 
 ta 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 d< ta 1 
 
 t 
 
 d' 
 
 d' 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 ta 
 
 1 
 
 The brightening efifect of transition to the first 
 s/tarp key may be contrasted with 
 the depressing effect of transition to 
 
 Mental Efffot of 
 
 FuT AND Sharp Keys 
 
 Contrasted. 
 
 the first y?tf/ key by exercises, in which pupils h'sten 
 and tell which is used. In this also the key must be 
 clearly defined as above. 
 
 Whether is a transition to a sharp or fiat key 
 suggested? 
 
 PI r d 
 sis 
 f PI r 
 
 PI B fe B 
 m d' ta 1 
 d PI f e B 
 
 d> t 1 ta 1 B f 
 
 d, 
 d 
 d 
 
 B 
 
 t d< B 1 ta 1 
 
 PI r B B fe B 
 
 f PI B fe fe B 
 
 t d* ta 1 t d' 
 
 Exercises in writing in correct time and tune should 
 be preceded by exercises in telling how many tones 
 
 are one pulse, two pulses, or a half- 
 pulse in length. Short exercises only 
 
 Tune and Time 
 comrineo. 
 
 should be used at first, and each should be sung once 
 to /aa, to enable pupils to catch the accent of the 
 measure. The form of composition known as the 
 Single Chant furnishes a convenient variety of exer- 
 cises for this purpose. As they are to be found in 
 
EAR EXERCISES FOR SENIOR DIVISION'S. 165 
 
 every Church Tune-book, a few examples only are 
 necessary. The « reciting tone " usually occupies a 
 complete measure without any definite duration sign 
 but for our purpose it should be written as a two- 
 pulse note. The double bar is usually placed at the 
 end of each section, but it is unnecessary to do so in 
 writing ear exercises. 
 Key G. 
 
 |d :-|t, :1, |8, :-||f :-jm :r Id :t, Id :-(| 
 
 Ke- G. I I » II 
 
 p:-|8 :f |n:-j|r :-(f :" |r :r |d :-Jj 
 |8 :-jl :1 |b :-||8 :-|I «ijn ;, jd :- || 
 
 Key F. ' ' U 
 
 |d :-Jr :n Jf :- j|f :_|„ .^^^ .4, .^ ._ 
 
 Key C. ■ '• 
 
 |d :-|n :8 |d' :- ||d' :-|s :m |r :r Id :-|| 
 
 Kev G. '• ' W 
 
 |n:-|r :d jf :- ||f .- jm :r |1, :t, |d :-|| 
 
 In giving the above, a pause should be made at the 
 end of the first section. 
 
 The tones of the Lah chord should be sung as 
 a preface to all exercises in the Minor mode. 
 
 1 n d' t 1 
 
 d' t 1 se 1 
 
 n d' 1 t se 
 
 p' 1 t sen| 
 
 1 d' 1 se 1 
 1 se 1 f m 
 n 1 se t 1 
 
 1*1 1 tsel 
 w f nsel 
 1 d' 1 t m 
 
 d t, n d ijll, f nseil] 
 
1 66 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 THE STAFF KOTATIOIT. ' / 
 
 The objection most frequently urged against the 
 Tonic Sol-fa system by its opponents is that "it pre- 
 vents pupils from learning the Staff Notation." This 
 objection can be met with an unqualified denial and 
 proved beyond dispute. In England, where the Tonic 
 Sol-fa system has had a fair trial for the past twenty- 
 five years, "it has made more readers of the Staff 
 Notation than all other systems combined.** The 
 truth of this statement, made several years ago, has 
 never once been challenged. In the examination for 
 the Elementary Certificate of the Tonic Sol-fa College, 
 the Staff Notation is not required, but in the Inter- 
 mediate examination there is an optional requirement 
 that candidates sing at sight from the Staff Notation. 
 Of those who pass this examination, statistics show 
 that about eighty per cent, pass in both notations. The 
 difficulty of teaching the Staff Notation to young 
 children is admitted by the majority of teachers, and 
 all of the so-called improved systems of teaching 
 employ some kind of introductory notation — in some 
 cases numerals, in others, patent character notes, 
 which serve as a medium of instruction until the Staff 
 is introduced. The multiplicity of those systems 
 only tends to prove that there are inherent difficulties 
 connected with the Staff which necessitate a simpler 
 system of notation for elementary instruction. The 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. . 167 
 
 simplicity of the Tonic Sol-fa Notation has already 
 b,*2n alluded to. While sufficient in itself for all 
 practical purposes of vocal music, and furnishing an 
 almost illimitable repertoire of choral music, it pro- 
 vides the most successful means of introduction to 
 the Staff Notation. The stage at which the transi- 
 tion from Sol-fa to the Staff should be made, depends 
 largely on the degree of ability attained in the use 
 of the former. For general school purposes we would 
 recommend that the transition be made not earlier 
 than Division V., and better results would be secured 
 by delaying until that has been fully mastered. The 
 two notations should then be studied concurrently, 
 the more difficult steps being first studied by the 
 Tonic Sol-fa system, in one Division, and translated 
 to the Staff in the next If the thing has been 
 thoroughly learnt by the Sol-fa system, the signs only 
 require to be learnt when the Staff is reached. This 
 can best be accomplished by written exercises in 
 translating from one notation to the other. In the 
 Tonic Sol-fa method of teaching the Staff Notation, 
 the arrangement of topics is identical with those 
 already described (see pages 9 and 134). Tune and 
 Time are studied separately, and the same educa- 
 tional principles which characterize the methods of 
 the Tonic Sol-fa system are employed in teaching 
 the Staff: 
 
 FIRST LESSON IN THE STAFF NOTATION. ' 
 
 Teacher. — What is this ? (Points to doh on first step modulator.) 
 Clan. — That is doh. 
 
i68 - THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 Teacher.— U that is doh what do you call this ? (Sings doh.) 
 
 C/a£5.— That is doh. 
 
 Teacher. — I do not think that both answers can be strictly correct. 
 Is doh something that we can hear or simply something that we can 
 see? 
 
 Class. — Tt is something we can hear. 
 
 Teacher. — Then your second answer must be correct, and your 
 first is wrong. This (pointing to doh) is simply the sign for doh. 
 Any other signs might have been taken for doh and the other tones, 
 but we have taken those which have been found most useful. 
 Suppose we take this desk as the sign for doh ; this chair, for me ; 
 and this map for M>h. Can you sing from a notation of desks, 
 Chairs and maps ? 
 
 C/a45.— We'll try. 
 
 Teacher. — (Points a first step exercise from the articles indicated 
 while pupils sing, and enjoy it.) You sang that very nicely ; but as 
 a notation of such articles would be rather awkward to use, we will 
 try something simpler. I will draw lines opposite d m and s, and 
 you will sing from my pointing as before. (Draws lines as indi- 
 cated ; class singing as directed.) This group of five lines and four 
 
 spaces is called a staflf, and the notation in which 
 
 they are used is known as the Staff Notation. 
 
 ^ 2ZZ We will now move the modulator a little higher. 
 
 d (Places d m b opposite the three lower spaces. 
 
 Pupils sing from pointing as before.) In this exercise we have d 
 in a space, where are m and ■ ? 
 
 Class. — They are also in spaces. 
 
 Teacher* — Let us place d on a line. Where are m and • now 
 placed ? 
 
 Class. — They are also on lines. 
 
 Teacher. — From this we get our first rule for 
 reading from the Staff, viz.: That doh me and 
 soh are similarly placed. 
 
 DOH, Me, Soh, 
 Similarly Placed. 
 
 Exercises in singing the tones d M B from the staff 
 with doh in any position will now be given. It is 
 a mistake to suppose that any one key is simpler 
 than another. The rules given apply irrespective 
 of key. 
 
' THE STAFF NOTATION. 169 
 
 Teacher. — (Place the modulator as before with doh opposite the 
 lower line.) Here we have d, m and ■ on lines, but where is the 
 octave of d placed ? , •' 
 
 C/a55.— It is ina space. • . 
 
 Teacher.— Quite right. Notes may be placed either on lines or 
 spaces. In this case we would have lah and t a'bove soh, conse- 
 quently d' must be in a space. From this we 
 get the second rule, viz.: That Octaves are 
 dissimilarly placed. If a note be on a line 
 
 OOTAVE8 ARE DiS- 
 8IMIURLY PUOEO. 
 
 where mnst its octave be ? 
 Class. — In a space. 
 
 Teacher. — And if a note bo in a space where must its octave be ? 
 Class. — On a line. 
 
 The octaves of b and m will now be taught in a 
 similar manner, the above rules being referred to for 
 explanation. Modulator voluntaries similar to those : 
 used in first step lessons should now be given, the 
 position of d being frequently changed, and pupils 
 required to remember its location throughout each 
 exercise. It is necessary that they become familiar 
 from the outset with the notes in any key. No 
 mention should be made of key signatures, sharps or 
 flatSy until the third step is reached, as this would 
 only tend to confuse. 
 
 Singing from notation will next be introduced. 
 A staff of five lines being drawn on the black-board, .f 
 with a square note to indicate the position of d, exer- 
 cises similar to the following will be sol-faed from * 
 the teacher's pointing : 
 
 
 .y 
 
 
 . ., , . 
 
 --• — •— 
 
 
 — •— 
 
 , 
 
 
 „ ^^L_ 
 
 —0— 
 
 
 / -i— ,- 
 
 — -— 
 
 -• — — 
 
 
 — #~ 
 
 
 
 — •— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ '< 
 
 - 
 
 -•-*- 
 
 « « 
 
 _*;_ 
 
 ff 
 
 ~#— 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 Z~9.-. 
 
 
17© 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK, 
 
 — — — __ 
 
 
 
 :--* * *■ * — 
 
 
 _JB IT 
 
 /< //T - i • • — 
 
 — ■ — • — 
 
 ■ . ... . ,. ,_. 
 
 _^ ^ 
 
 — ■ — #--— — « #— 
 
 • 
 
 ■ ■ ».'■■ <- 
 
 -,__i -^_# 
 
 When it becomes necessary to have more than five 
 lines, short lines named Ledger lines are added, as : — 
 
 — • ' — — — — m ZM 
 
 P » — * r M •'- M 
 
 The exercises in sight-singing should be followed 
 by exercises in writing translations from the Tonic 
 Sol-fa to the Staff Notation. By using the first step 
 exercises in the " Canadian Music Course," Books I. 
 and III., which are adapted to this purpose, much time 
 may be economised, as it will only be necessary to 
 indicate the numbers of the exercises to be translated. 
 
Tim. 
 
 THE STAFK NOTATION. 17 I 
 
 Time is indicated in the Staff Nota- 
 tion by the shape of the various notes. 
 The notes in common use are as follows : — 
 
 Breve. Whole note. 1/2 note. 1/4 note. 1/8 note. x/i6 note. 1/33 note. 
 
 li^li « f f f ^ . f 
 
 The Breve is now seldom used. ' ; , , r 
 
 It rfiust be ob-served that there is no connection 
 between the terms note and pulse. A 
 whole note is never equal to a whole 
 
 Terms 
 Note AND Pui IE. 
 
 pulse, m fact it never indicates less than two pulses, 
 and frequently is equal to as many as eight pulses. 
 The relative values of the whole, half, and quarter- 
 notes should first be explained. Simple exercises 
 should then be translated from pupils' dictation, and 
 written on the blackboard. 
 
 Example: — 
 Write: M .^ M ;- Id id Id :~ 
 
 Teacher. — In this exercise we will take the half.note to represent 
 the pulse. As there is only one tone indicated, one line will be 
 sufficient. How many pulses have we in the measure ? 
 Class. — We have two. 
 
 Teacher. — Which sign denotes the Strong pulse ? ..v -> 
 
 Class. — The upright bar. ' ' 
 
 Teacher.— We use the same sign for the strong pulse in the Staff 
 Notation, but no sign is given for the medium or weak pulses. 
 
 I 
 
 Teacher.— "Which note will we take to represent the first d ? 
 Class. — The half-note. 
 
 T^flcA^r.— (Writes half-note in first measure.) And which for 
 the second d? 
 
lya THE teacher's handbook 
 
 Class. — Another half-note. 
 
 Teacher. — As the next d is two pulses in length we must use a 
 different note. Which shall it be ? 
 
 Class. — The whole note. 
 
 Teacher. — What reason can you give for taking the whole note ? 
 
 Class. — If one pulse is represented by a half-note, a two-pulse 
 tone must have a note that is equal to two half- notes. 
 
 Proceeding by this method to build up the remain- 
 der of the exercise, it will now appear as, — 
 
 \r r\"—\ r r 
 
 -«'- 
 
 The value of the notes is not affected by the stems 
 being .turned up or down. When the notes stand 
 above the middle line, the stems are turned down, 
 and when below, they are turned up. When placed 
 on the middle line they may be turned in either direc- 
 tion. The time-names should also be applied to the 
 Staff in teaching time. The following shows the 
 time-names when the pulse is represented by a half- 
 pulse, quarter-note, and eighth-note respectively : 
 
 Half-note Quarter-note Eighth -note 
 to a pulse, to a pulse. to a pulse. 
 
 One-pulse note, TAA. r P P 
 
 Two-pulse note, ri4i4 i4i4. ^ P f 
 
 Two half. pulse notes, Taa tat. • ^ f f 5 5 
 
 A dot placed immediately after a note increases its 
 length by one-half of its own value^ thus : — 
 
 "• ^"r r-f[ r-rt t-n 
 
 Time signatures are used to denote 
 the number of pulses in a measure. 
 
 Time Sionatures. 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 «73 
 
 The upper figure gives the number, and the lower 
 the quality of the notes in the measure. 
 
 Two half notes 
 in a measure. 
 
 Two quarter 
 A^ noies. 
 
 Three quarter 
 notes. 
 
 I Three half 
 notes. 
 
 Three eighth 
 notes. 
 
 iFour quarter 
 1 notes. 
 
 Six eighth 
 notes. 
 
 The sign Q is frequently used to represent four- 
 pulse measure, being unfortunately substituted for 
 
 J and also for §• The sign Jl is also used to repre- 
 *sent two-pulse measure. The time signatures indi- 
 cated by either ^ or JB are usually termed Common 
 Time. 
 
 The following exercises are to be sung on one tone 
 to the time-names, then to Icuii — - • 
 
 -M- 
 
 QUARTER-NOTE TO A PULSE. 
 FouR-PuLSB Measure. 
 
 --4— 
 
 #^^f^ 
 
 J X 
 
 -m — # 
 
 taa taa taa taa taa taa taa-aa taa taa taa-aa taa-aa taa-aa 
 
 4 4- 
 
 M^^^^k^ 
 
 -A±Eiii 
 
 taa-aa taa-aa taa taa taa-aa taa taa taa taa taa-aa-aa-aa. 
 
 ^ 
 
 4-4- 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 ^—^ 
 
 bk 
 
 i 
 
 kk^~U 
 
 I 
 
 -t5»- 
 
 ^M 
 
 Thrbe-Pulsb Measurk. 
 
 ^E^ 
 
 i 
 
174 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 HALF-NOTE TO A PULSE. 
 
 I 
 
 P 
 
 ■i9- 
 
 ■i9-^ 
 
 (5>- 
 
 r — r 
 
 :i?: 
 
 ■i9- 
 
 P^¥" 
 
 -i9- 
 
 n?- 
 
 m^ 
 
 — ^-i. 
 
 HALF-PULSES. 
 
 if^=PFf^ g^^E^^^ 
 
 «>■ 
 
 taa taa taa tai taa taa taa tai taa tai taa taa-aa-aa-aa. 
 
 -I- 
 
 m 
 
 ^^^M 
 
 W4 
 
 -M 
 
 «-l5?^ 
 
 1— -| ' 
 
 -i9 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ kr±jrnfjvi 
 
 N ^ 
 
 — I- 
 
 -l-« 
 
 -# - 4- - 
 
 i.^4^::^^i#if^^^ 
 
 TUNE AND TIME COMBINED. 
 
 B^ pS^Sag g 
 
 H 
 
 ■>- 
 
 4- 
 
 3E&3 
 
 ^^i^S 
 
 s 
 
 cz 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 — iC 
 
 :i!: 
 
 i^ 
 
 -4- 
 
 -5t 
 
 i 
 
 t*- 
 
 --f5> 
 
 a 
 
 ■f9- 
 
 -^ 
 
 -JSL 
 
 M — '5' — 
 
 -J I * 
 
f' 
 
 THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 -l-r 
 
 175 
 
 1 
 
 l-^L. 
 
 -iSf 
 
 -i9- 
 
 
 -tf»- 
 
 i 
 
 -t5>-^ 
 
 ssga 
 
 C3M 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^H 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?f=1^ 
 
 :fnc 
 
 ^ 
 
 WITH HALF-PULSES. 
 
 B^ ^T^f^^ ijiipjia 
 
 B 
 
 E2=l: 
 
 li^ 
 
 3^ 
 
 :T 
 
 £E^ 
 
 -«5> 
 
 -3 a- 
 
 ^-^: 
 
 >-^-,ni=l-^S 
 
 Ml 
 
 *■ 
 
 L ^ » ' 
 
 L-j i 1_« 5, «— «-l 
 
 
 SECOND STEP. 
 
 Before introducing the tones of the Second Step, 
 the tones of the DOH chord should be thoroughly 
 practised in every available position on the staff. 
 
 Ray will be easily recognized as 
 occupying the next position above 
 
 Positions 
 OF Te and Ray. 
 
 doh, and te the next below. Exercises adapted to 
 this step (see page 92-93) should be sung from point- 
 ing on the blank staff of five lines, in various keys. 
 The object of exercises at this stage is not to aid 
 to a conception of the tones, this has already been 
 done, but to teach their correct location in any key. 
 
176 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 The necessity of changing the key frequently will 
 be obvious. The position of the key-tone must also 
 be kept before the mind throughout each exercise. 
 
 EXERCISES IN TUNE. 
 
 ^ te J 3 z g3^^ ^ 
 
 -m—0 
 
 i 
 
 :p=t- 
 
 :^#- 
 
 --t^ 
 
 ^ ^^m 
 
 3^^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 E^^^^^fe 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 I 
 
 £ 
 
 L 4—^ 
 
 W- 
 
 ^zj- -j ^p--"^ 
 
 3± 
 
 :iJ: 
 
 E 
 
 i5»- 
 
 ii 
 
 T 
 
 m 
 
 T 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■a>- 
 
 -Of- 
 
 -32 
 
 -<s»- 
 
 The sight-singing exercises on page 95, or the 
 second-step exercises in the "Canadian Music Course," 
 may be translated into th'^; Staff and practised in 
 addition to the above. 
 
 The new points to be explained in 
 this step are quarter-pulses, half-pulse 
 
 Time. 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 »77 
 
 continuations, and silent pulses. In the Sol-fa Nota- 
 tion rests are indicated by empty spaces, but in the 
 
 Staff Notation signs of various shapes 
 are employed for this purpose, each 
 
 Ruts. 
 
 note having a rest of equal value. A dot placed 
 immediately after a note increases its length by one- 
 half. The following table shows the notes with rests 
 of corresponding value : — 
 
 
 
 
 
 or 
 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 h-r- 
 
 — ■ — 
 
 — m 
 
 ^-^- 
 
 -A 
 
 -^ 
 
 — 9 — 
 
 -f±- 
 
 — ■ — * 
 
 rftglM 
 
 -Zf- 
 
 upj 
 
 4-^ 
 
 H- 
 
 r 
 
 — 
 
 Y 
 
 .. t .*. 
 
 [^ 
 
 1 Slurs. 
 
 WJien two or more eighth-notes, 
 or notes of lesser value are intended 
 
 to be sung to one syllable, the stems are joined 
 together by a sign called a slur, thus : — 
 
 ^Efe j^^E^g 
 
 -fS*- 
 
 As in Tune, the position of the key-tone has to be 
 kept in mind, it is equally important that in Time the 
 Time-Signatures be remembered throughout. The 
 following shows the notation of the new rhythms 
 under various conditions : — 
 
 1/2 note 
 to a pulse. 
 
 rr 
 
 1/4 note 
 to a pulse. 
 
 1/8 note 
 to a pulse. 
 
 TAA-aa tai. 
 Tafatefe, 
 
 The close resemblance betweeen the signs for rests 
 must be noticed. The whole-note rest is placed under 
 
 
178 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 the line, while the half-note rest is placed above the 
 line ; the quarter-note rest is turned to the rights and 
 the eighth-note rest to the left, 
 
 exercisf:s in time. 
 
 2 
 
 t5>- 
 
 
 :- i ^— r- 
 
 5^S 
 
 -«»- 
 
 taa taa taa-tai taa taa ta - fa - te - fe taa-aa 
 
 •— I 1 
 
 m^^^^^^m^m^ 
 
 ^^m 
 
 ^-^^^^ 
 
 -«5»— ■ 
 
 ii 
 
 -^- 
 
 ^ 
 
 -«•- 
 
 -«>- 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^i 
 
 LI 
 
 f=rfc=fc 
 
 p^m^m^ 
 
 :{?iir-: 
 
 r- 
 
 ^f^ff^ ^m^ f^fff 
 
 ■<«?■ 
 
 THIRD STEP. 
 
 In this step fah and lah are added and the scale 
 IS now complete. Fah occupies the next position 
 below soh, and lah the next above. In practice, we 
 have found the most satisfactory method of treating 
 
 the complete scale to be that of 
 teaching by Chord. It has already 
 
 Teaohinq by 
 Chord. 
 
 been shown that a Chord consists of a note with its 
 l/iird and ^///, which is simply two thirds in succes- 
 sion. It will be noted that the lines or spaces of the 
 Staff are arranged in thirds respectively, consequently 
 the notes of a chord must be similarly placed on lines 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. I 79 
 
 or Spaces, and the octaves of either must be dissimi- 
 larly placed, thus : — If d Pi S be on the lines, B| l*l| d| 
 must be in spaces. These facts should be clearly 
 understood by the pupils before drilling on the com- 
 plete scale. The names of the notes of each chord 
 should now be thoroughly memorized, reading upwards 
 as follows : — d 1*1 B, n 8 t» 8 t r', t r' f . All of the 
 above must be similarly placed with doh» whether 
 it be on lines or spaces. The chords which are dis- 
 similarly placed with doh should now be memorized, 
 thus :— r f 1, fid', Id' Pi', d' Pi' 8'. This may be 
 done by reading from the modulator at first, but 
 latterly the modulator should be kept out of sight, 
 and pupils trained to name the tones of any chord 
 without any aid whatever, thus : — 
 
 Tbachbr. Class. 
 
 Read the tones of the Doh chord upwards. d n s 
 
 «• " Fah " " fid' 
 
 4 u Ray " »* r f 1 
 
 •• •* SoH "downwards. r' t 8 
 
 « " Lah " " w d' 1 
 
 Exercises in which all notes are on lines, or all on 
 spaces should now be sung from pointing on a blank 
 staff, until the relative positions of the notes in any 
 key are thoroughly taught. These should be followed 
 by sight-singing from the blackboard. "".^.^ exercises 
 on page 113 may be translated for thi ^, jrpose. 
 
i8o 
 
 THE TKACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 
 mi 
 
 CLEFS. 
 The Staff Notation represents the absolute pitch of 
 notes, by means of signs called clefs. The clefs in 
 general use are three in number, viz. — 
 
 G CLEF 2k F CLEF ^ C CLEF -Wl- 
 
 The Great Staff is composed of eleven lines, natned 
 as follows : — 
 
 •r — 
 
 - e 
 
 Owing to the difficulty in reading from such a karge 
 staff, it has been found necessary to divide it into two 
 parts, with middle C as a ledger line between. The 
 following represents the staff as usually written for 
 vocal hiusic, with the clefs in their proper places. 
 Notice that the fourth line passes through the %,entre 
 of the F clef, and that the G clef turns on the s^ond 
 line of the upper section of the staff. 
 
 i 
 
 @= 
 
 ji_A. 
 
 :ez:^ 
 
 rxi_o — , 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 l8l 
 
 The G and F clefs are always written in the above 
 positions, but the C clef is placed in various positions, 
 to adapt the staff to the compass of different voices 
 and instruments. When placed on the first of a 
 group of five lines it is called the Soprano clef; second 
 line, Mezzo-Soprano clef; third line, Alto clef; and 
 fourth line, Tenor clef. 
 
 In the following exercises notice the position of 
 the key-tone in the respective clefs : — 
 
 ^^^ ^PP^^^ 
 
 -^~ 
 
 ^^^^^^^ 
 
 f f r-g 
 
 3C 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 =f 
 
 I 
 
 BUS 
 
 -i=^ 
 
 p{^Tirrf^ 
 
 'Mzuns 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 KEY SIGNATURES. 
 The staff is always understood 8 
 to be in the key of C, unless 
 marked otherwise. Pupils who \ 
 have studied transition from the 
 Modulator will understand that, y 
 when we wish to write a tune 
 in the key of G, it becomes ^ 
 necessary to sharpen fah of the t| 
 old key, in order to have te of the ■. 
 new key just a little step below ' 
 doh' Likewise when we change B| 
 
 c 
 
 B 
 
 d' 
 
 t 
 
 C f 
 B m 
 
 A 
 
 1 
 
 A r 
 
 G 
 
 F 
 E 
 
 s 
 f 
 
 G d 
 
 E 1, 
 
 D 
 
 r 
 
 D 8| 
 
 C 
 
 d 
 
 C f. 
 
l82 
 
 THE TEACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 from the key of C to F we flatten te, to have fah of the i 
 new key just a little step above me. (See diagram at 
 side). When a tune has to be written in the key of 
 G, the sharp is placed on the F line, and every note 
 on that line must be sung or played a semitone higher - 
 than in the key of C. This will not cause any diffi- 
 culty to the Sol-fa pupil, who will simply think of the 
 note as te. 
 
 In the key of F, a flat is placed on the B line, and 
 all notes on that line are sung or played a semitone 
 lower than in the key of C. Pupils will easily recog- 
 nise that the note on which the flat is placed is fah. . 
 
 By studying the transitions on the Modulator it 
 will readily be seen how the sharps or flats are suc- 
 cessively added to form the signatures for the more 
 remote keys. The following table gives the order 
 of the sharp keys on the right, and the flat keys on 
 the left of C, which require no signature : — 
 
 TABLE OF KEY SIGNATURES. 
 Read from centre, either left or right 
 
 At> Et> B> F C G D A E B 
 
 if: 
 
 Rules for finding Doh. — The last sharp to the 
 right is te ; the last flat to the right is fah — or the 
 second last flat is always doh. ■ • 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 183 
 
 FOURTH STEP. 
 
 In the Staff Notation the key signature is seldom 
 altered when a transition to a new key is made. In 
 this respect it is certainly ambiguous and confusing 
 to the learner, and even the best singers have to pause 
 and study the music before definitely comprehending 
 the nature of the transition. This can only be 
 accomplished by a careful study of the various key 
 signatures, and the manner in which they are affected 
 by the various accidentals. 
 
 When fah is sharpened it becomes fe, and wjien 
 te is sharpened it becomes ta. A sharp or flat placed 
 immediately before a note is termed an accidental. 
 
 An accidental affects all notes on the line or space 
 on which it is placed, within the measure^ unless 
 contradict«?d by a sign called a natural (jf). 
 
 If a note ha.s been raised a semitone, a natural will 
 lower it to its original pitch ; if it has been lowered 
 a semitone, a natural will raise it to its original pitch. 
 
 EXERCISES IN TRANSITION. 
 Impbrpbct Mbthod. 
 
 ^^^rr^-^^BS^j^j 
 
 t=t- 
 
 ^^^m 
 
 SE? 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^^^B 
 
 1^ — ^ 
 
 ■:si:szi. 
 
 ^hj^^=f^=^^^^^ 
 
1 84 
 
 THE TEACHERS HANDBOOK. 
 
 Bettbr Method. 
 
 "1, 
 
 «(lf 
 
 iipi 
 
 ^^^^^s^ 
 
 -«5>- 
 
 ».t, 
 
 4. 
 
 PM 
 
 3:^tJEjz|:jLJ4^ 
 
 ^•t 
 
 •.d 
 
 ^^m^m 
 
 ^tj 
 
 ES^ 
 
 P 
 
 FIFTH STEP. 
 
 Exercises in the Minor Mode. 
 SoH sharp is Se, and Fah sharp is Ba. 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 Si 
 
 ^^^^^^:^S 
 
 :Sl: 
 
 ^^^lE Jl J ^ ^^ ^ j j^^^ 
 
 fe fe^^J^^^^^^g^N^ 
 
 -Oh 
 
 ^^m^m^^ 
 
 19- 
 
THE STAFF NOTATION. 
 
 >8S 
 
 l%^jjj.F-4"?-j;^ ^a^5MNI 
 
 |>Trnrfi¥^m ;;gp^^ifefe^ 
 
 As indicated in the Preface, the exercises are not 
 intended to be sufficient in themselves for all practical 
 purposes, but simply to serve as examples to be 
 imitated by the teacher in preparing the daily music 
 lesson. Space will not permit of a full discussion of 
 the many technicalities of Theory and Notation. 
 Teachers who wish to gain a more complete know- 
 ledge of Musical Theory, are recommended to study 
 the undermentioned text books, any of which can be 
 obtained direct from Messrs. Curwen, Warwick Lane, 
 London, E.G., or ordered through local booksellers : 
 " The Staff Notation," price 8d.; " The Staff Notation 
 Primer," price 6d.; " Musical Theory," Books I. and II., 
 price 4d. eacii. The latter are specially useful. A 
 complete course of exercises and songs for the school- 
 room are contained in " The Canadian Music Course," 
 published in three books, specially adapted to the 
 requirements of Canadian Public and High Schools. 
 
i86 THE teacher's handbook. 
 
 MARKS OF EXPRESSION. 
 
 NAMB. SIGN. 
 
 Mezzo (tnetso), medium m. 
 
 Piano (peeahno), soft p. 
 
 Forte (jfortay), loud ./. 
 
 Fortissimo, very loud ff. 
 
 Pianissimo, very soft pp. 
 
 Crescendo (creshendo), getting louder cres. 
 
 Diminuendo (deemeenooendo), getting softer dim.-. 
 
 Decrescendo same as Diminuendo decres.z 
 
 Slur, a sign denoting that two or more notes are to be ^^^- Sol-fa. 
 
 sung to one syllable . . .* f r ^ ^ 
 
 Pressure Tone, rapid cres. on single tone <: 
 
 Sforzando {sfortzanndo), rapid dim. on single tone 
 
 begun loud >-, or sf. 
 
 Rapid Swell, like pressure tone A 
 
 Da Capo, repeat from the beginning D.C. 
 
 Dal Segno, repeat from the sign D S. :g: 
 
 TEMPO OR SPEED. 
 
 I. — SLOW. 
 ITALIAN TERM. LITERAL MEANING. 
 
 Largo (lahrgo) Broad, large. 
 
 Grave (grahv) Heavy, grave. 
 
 Adagio (adahgio) Slowly. 
 
 Lento (lehnto) Sluggish, tarH y. 
 
 Larghetto (largetto) Less slow th i Largo. 
 
 II. — MEDIUM. 
 
 Andante (andantay) Moderate. 
 
 Andantino (andanteeno) Less slow than Andante. 
 
 Moderato (modderahto) Moderate, sober. 
 
 Allegretto {allegretto) Diminutive of Allegro. 
 
 III. — QUICK. 
 
 Allegro (alleggro) Cheerful, brisk. 
 
 Vivace (veevahchay) Sprightly, lively. 
 
 Vivacissimo Superlative of vivace. 
 
 Presto (pressto) Quick, nimbly. 
 
 Prestissimo Superlative of presto. 
 
 IV.— CHANGES WITHIN A PHRASE. 
 
 Accelerando Getting faster. 
 
 R.iardando ) ' r^ **• „ i 
 
 Rallentando } Gettmg slower. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 ROTE SONGS. 
 
 KeyF. 
 
 Mc meet again togetber. 
 
 :si 
 
 I. We 
 
 l2. A 
 
 :8| 
 
 We 
 And 
 
 d :m |r :d 
 
 meet a -gain to - 
 ring of hap - py 
 
 d :m |r :d 
 
 gladly greet each , 
 
 thus we stand u-| ni - ted, 
 
 t| :r |— :m 
 
 gether, With 
 children, Each 
 
 f :f |n :r 
 
 faces bright and 
 holds anoth-er's 
 
 A. T. 
 
 n :— I 
 
 sweet, 
 hand, 
 
 C. 
 
 -I 
 
 ti :r I— :m |r :s |fe :1 
 
 oth-er, 
 
 Our I teachers dear we 
 A I mer-ry lit - tie 
 
 s :-|- 
 
 greet, 
 band, 
 
 [:b 11 :s If :n 
 
 I We're I ready for our 
 V All ' things are fair a- 
 
 :s 11 :i 
 
 r :n |f :s 
 
 1 :s If ;m 
 
 work and play, We're ready for our singing, l 
 round us now, While| working or whilej singing, J 
 
 PI :r | — 
 
 singing. 
 
 I 
 
 s If :n 
 
 Our fiiands are clean now, 
 Out I eyes are bright with 
 
 :si Id :m |r :d 
 
 Then I as we meet to- gether, 
 ^ Then I as we meet to- gether, 
 
 r im If :s 
 
 seethem, pray. And 
 hap-pi - ness. Our 
 
 it| :r I— :m 
 
 1 :s If 
 
 :r 
 
 We 
 We 
 
 / * 
 
 :b, 
 
 That 
 I That 
 
 d :m |r :d 
 
 we'll be kind and 
 we'll be kind and 
 
 t| :r |— :pi 
 
 patient, 
 patient, 
 
 That 
 That 
 
 hear our voi-ces 
 voi-ces glad are 
 
 f :f |m ;r 
 
 cheerful-ly will 
 cheerful-ly will 
 
 r :f It, :r 
 
 we'll be good to 
 we'll be good to- 
 
 r :d I — 
 
 ringing, 
 ringing, 
 
 m : 
 
 say, 
 say, 
 
 d :- 
 
 day. 
 day. 
 
i88 
 
 KeyG. 
 
 *B| ..Bi 
 
 I. Oh a 
 >2. When 
 
 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Ube Donest t^oa^♦ 
 :d .d I d :ti .d 
 
 queer lit- tie chap is the 
 win - ter draws near, Master 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 r .r :t|.(ti)|d :r 
 
 honest olu toad, A i 
 Toad goes to bed, And ) 
 
 \ 
 
 n.m :d .d |f .f VP\S^ 
 
 funny old fellow is 
 
 sleeps just as sound as a 
 
 d :d .d Ir 
 
 :r .r 
 
 un - der the stone by the 
 J May blos-soms fol - - low 
 
 :- I- 
 
 :bi .Si 
 
 he, Liv-ing 
 
 top, But when 
 
 m :r .ni |f .f :n .r ) 
 
 side of the road, Neath the 
 soft April showers, He comes 
 
 d :ti .1| |si :ti ,r 
 
 shade of the old wil-low 
 
 out with a skip, jump and 
 
 tree, 
 hop. 
 
 :- I- :t, .d 
 
 He is 
 He 
 
 :r .r 
 
 :d .r 
 
 dressed all in brown from his 
 chan - ges his dress on - ly 
 
 n 
 
 toe 
 once 
 
 :m .m in 
 
 :m .m j 
 
 to his crown, Save his 1 
 I con - fess, — Ev' - ry ) 
 
 \t ,t I m :d .d 
 
 vest that is silv 
 spring ; and his old 
 
 takes 
 trou 
 
 :d.d 
 
 'ry 
 worn-out 
 
 :r .r 
 
 white, 
 coat . . 
 
 a long nap in the 
 sers and waist - coat, he 
 
 n 
 
 heat 
 rolls 
 
 d :ti .li |8| :ti .r 
 
 walks in the cool dew-y 
 stuffs the whole thing down his 
 
 — — :si 
 
 of the day, 
 in a ball, 
 
 :- I- 
 
 He 
 With 
 
 :r .m If :n .r 
 
 And 
 And 
 
 :bi 
 
 night "Raup, 
 
 throat "Krruk. 
 
ROTE SONGS. 
 
 THE HONEST TOAD.— continued. 
 
 d :si .S| |d :ti .d 
 
 yaup," says the frog, From his 
 krruk," says the frog, From his 
 
 he says nev 
 he says nev 
 
 :d .d Ir 
 
 1. :li .t, Id 
 
 toad 
 toad 
 
 tries 
 tries 
 
 seen, 
 seen, 
 
 :r .r 
 
 er 
 er 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 be good, 
 be good, 
 
 :ti .li Is 
 
 :r .r 
 
 like the 
 like the 
 
 :ti .r 
 
 home 
 home 
 
 8| 
 
 word ; , 
 word ; . 
 
 m 
 
 chil - 
 chil - 
 
 in the bog, 
 in the bog, 
 
 :- I- 
 
 189 
 
 :ti .S| Id :d t 
 
 I 
 
 But the 
 But the ) 
 
 :si 
 
 He 
 He 
 
 :r .m If :n .r 
 
 dren who should Be 
 dren who should Be 
 
 but 
 but 
 
 nev-er be 
 nev-er be 
 
 d :- 
 
 heard, 
 heard. 
 
 tTbe Summer IRatn. 
 
 Key E^ 
 
 n .m :m .m |r .n :f 
 
 1. Patter, patter,! comes the rain, 
 
 2. See it coming | down the hill. 
 
 r .r :r .r 
 
 Tapping at my 
 In a lit-tle 
 
 1 .t :d' .8 |m .f :s 
 
 On the roof and I on the ground, 
 Leaping.laughingj bright and gay, 
 
 8 .f :m .8 
 
 Patter, patter. 
 Much I love the 
 
 d'.ta:8 .f 
 
 To the fields of 
 Mak-Ing bright each 
 
 1 .1 :1 
 
 on the street, 
 gen-tle rain, 
 
 n .f :8 
 
 waving grain, 
 tree and flow'r, 
 
 1 .t :d' .f 
 
 Patter, patter, 
 Pleasant words it 
 
 1 .8 :f .1 
 
 Making mus-ic 
 Tapping at my 
 
 1 .t :d' .f 
 
 Welcome is the 
 In the wood and 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 n.l :8 
 
 window pane, 
 sparkling rill, 
 
 m .r :d 
 
 all a - round, 
 seems to say. 
 
 t .t :t 
 
 low and sweet, 
 win-dow pane, 
 
 m .r :d 
 
 summer rain, 
 garden bower. 
 
190 
 
 THE teacher's HANDBOOK. 
 
 Bi :ni :n Si :m :m 
 
 1. Under the ap - pie - 
 
 2. On her brown a - prdn 
 
 3. Gravely she sits with 
 
 4. "Z>asA,"fullof joy in 
 
 5. Sunshine and soft sum~mer 
 
 tree 
 and 
 a 
 the 
 
 ^n^cr tbe Hpplc XTrcc* 
 
 Key G. Beating twice. 
 
 n :r :r 
 
 spreading and thick, 
 
 bright drooping head, 
 
 se - ri - - ous look, 
 
 bright sum-mer day, 
 
 bree-zes a - stir, 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 S| :r :r |S| :r :n 
 
 Hap-py 
 Showers 
 Mak-ing 
 Zeal-ous • 
 While she 
 
 with on - 
 
 of 
 
 pink 
 lieve 
 
 be ■ 
 
 ^y 
 
 cha • 
 
 IS 
 
 bu . 
 
 ly a 
 and white 
 she's a 
 ses the 
 sy are 
 
 m :s :s |m :s :s 
 
 On tbe soft grass in the 
 Tied to a branch that seems 
 Sun - dry brown splash-es on 
 Barks at the squir-rels or 
 Cheeks ro - sy glow - ing and 
 
 8 :m :d Is :in :d 
 
 r :d :d Id :— :— 
 
 Our lit - tie Fan- 
 
 Dan-ces and flut • 
 
 Show that our Fan 
 
 All the while Fan 
 
 Bring they to Fan - ny while 
 
 ny 
 ters 
 ny 
 •ny 
 
 IS 
 
 her 
 
 is 
 
 is 
 
 Ean and a stick, 
 
 los-soms are shed, 
 
 real pas - try cook, 
 
 ro - bins a - way, 
 
 bu - sy with her, 
 
 d :ti :d |r :— 
 
 sha - dow that lies, 
 
 made just for that, 
 
 fore - head and eyes, 
 
 snaps at the flies, 
 
 bright sparkling eyes, 
 
 r :m :r Id :— 
 
 mak-ing 
 lit - tie 
 mak-ing 
 mak-ing 
 mak-ing 
 
 mud pies, 
 straw hat. 
 mud pies, 
 mud pies, 
 mud pies. 
 
 ym a Xittlc 3Busi? J5ec. 
 
 KeyF. 
 
 Si .d :d .m | m .r :r d ti :d .n j m .r 
 
 I.I'm alit-tle bu-sy bee, 
 2. I'm a lit-tle bu-sy bee, 
 
 S|.d :d .n |r»i .r :r 
 
 Here I go, There I go, 
 All the day I'm bright and gay. 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 Roaming in the clo-ver, 
 In the mea-dows roaming, 
 
 8 .r :r .n |r .d 
 
 All the mea-dows o - ver. 
 Where the flowers are blooming. 
 
KeyF. 
 
 d :n.r l d :t.d 
 
 SECOND STEP SONGS. 
 
 r :si Id :— I 
 
 191 
 
 1. Lit-tle chil - dren 
 
 2. Do not vex or 
 
 in their play, 
 teaze a child, 
 
 n :s 
 
 r :— 
 
 good should be, 
 play-mate sad, 
 
 d :t|.d |r :d.m 
 
 s :r m :n 
 
 Ve - ry 
 But be 
 
 care - ful, 
 lov - ing, 
 
 Then their sports we 
 Love will make each 
 
 r :t| Id :— 
 
 love to see. 
 heart feel glad. 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 d :t|.d |r :d.r 
 
 Al - ways kind and 
 Do not make a j 
 
 s :r 
 
 m 
 
 too, each day, 
 kind and mild, 
 
 "dp in tbe nDorntng Earls. 
 
 Key G. C. M. S. Twice. 
 
 ( :(si) 
 
 I. Up 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 m :r :d 
 
 :d :ti 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 up in the morn - - ing 
 Wake with a glad " Good 
 All through the day He will 
 
 - Is, 
 
 - ly. 
 
 - ing 
 you. 
 
 n 
 
 r t 
 
 :8| 
 
 And 
 To 
 .From 
 
 f:(si) 
 
 And a 
 . So 
 
 /:Si 
 
 Who 
 ,And 
 
 m 
 
 :r :d Id :t| :d 
 
 ear . ly to bed at 
 
 sis - ters and bro - - thers 
 
 sin and the temp • - ter's 
 
 " :r :d |r :d :t| 
 
 That is the way to be 
 
 thank - ful heart to 
 
 dear child re - mem - ber God 
 
 d :- 
 
 ear - . 
 morn - 
 keep 
 
 • 
 
 * • • 
 
 night, 
 dear, 
 snare, 
 
 d :— :— |bi :— 
 
 heal 
 
 Je 
 sees 
 
 thy, 
 sus, 
 
 you, 
 
 i 
 
 Si :d :pi 
 
 :d :ti 
 
 Hap-py good chil - dren and 
 all night has been so 
 
 is pre - sent ev' - - ry 
 
 d :~ :- I- :~ 
 
 bright. 
 
 near. 
 
 where. 
 
192 
 
 THE TICACHER S HANDBOOK. 
 
 XTbts May anD tbat Mai?* 
 
 Key A. C. M. S. 
 
 d :r .m 
 
 1 . This way and 
 
 2. Bus - i - ly 
 
 3. When work is 
 
 r :d .r 
 
 March-ing and 
 we are as 
 we has-ten 
 
 :si .(S|) 
 
 that way, 
 work - ing, We 
 end ed, And 
 
 m :d ,(d) 
 
 sing - ing With 
 hap - py As 
 home- ward To 
 
 d :t| .d 
 
 Left foot and 
 rest when we 
 play - time is 
 
 r :m .r 
 
 fa - ces so 
 birds on the 
 pa - rents once 
 
 right, 
 
 smg, 
 
 o'er, 
 
 bright. 
 
 wing. 
 
 more. 
 
 A.T.C 
 
 :- .(r) \ 
 
 And 
 Then } 
 
 Key D. C. M. S. 
 
 8 .m :s .m 
 
 1. Tell me, little 
 
 2. Pretty child, I 
 
 3. What I gather! is so sweet, My 
 
 Ube JSuci? JSce. 
 
 m .r :r .(r) 
 
 bus-y bee, 
 fly a - way, 
 
 s .m :s .d' 
 
 Are you go - ing 
 But I ga-ther 
 
 d'.m :s .(s) 
 
 mar-kei-ing, 
 all the day From 
 
 pretty playthingsl I bring home,My 
 
 r .r :d .r 
 
 Wheie are you 
 I'm a „ jol-ly 
 time it is my 
 
 s .r :r .m 
 
 Pretty playthings 
 all the flow'rs and 
 child they're combs of 
 
 A. T. C. 
 
 m .8 :- .(8) ] 
 
 flying ? 
 
 rover, 
 
 money, 
 
 r .d :— 
 
 buying ? 
 
 clover. 
 
 honey. 
 
 The J 
 
 KeyG. 
 
 d :d 
 
 flow (Boo^ "Wigbt 
 
 8 :m 
 
 r.d :r.m I r :d 
 
 1 
 
 1. Now good night, now 
 
 2. Lightly here day 
 
 3. One will watch us 
 
 t :— I— : 
 
 night, 
 
 may, 
 
 keep, 
 
 8.r :r.m |r :r 
 
 One and all good night to 
 Singwe now good night, good 
 Now to all good nighti good 
 
 all good night, 
 af - ter day, 
 while we sleep. 
 
 Adapted. 
 
 d.d:d.d|s :d ' 
 
 :r 
 
 8 :i*i 
 
 Teachers dear and 
 All our hearts are 
 Soon will dawn the 
 
 d :- 
 
 Now to all a kind good 
 Learning what of good we 
 For He nlways watch doth 
 
 r.d:r.mlr :d 
 
 schoolmates too, 
 free and light, 
 morn-ing light, 
 
 you. 
 
 night. 
 
 night.